2021 Jeep Compass 69

2 02 1 COMPASS
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
202 1 CO MPASS
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
21_MP_OM_EN_USC
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
Second Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
used in substitution therefore. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by comply with all local laws.
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s convenient reference source for common questions.
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off- Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
use public transportation.
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a WARNING!
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 65 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 86 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 138 5
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 212 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 271 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................296 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 351
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 357
10
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................. 361
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS................................................................... 21 MIRRORS...............................................................37

Manual Door Locks...................................... 21 Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 37
Symbols Key............................................................ 8
Power Door Locks........................................ 22 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................... 38
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 8 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry........... 22 Outside Mirrors ........................................... 38
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......... 9 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ................ 25 Power Adjustment Mirrors .......................... 38
Symbol Glossary ..................................................... 9 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Folding Mirrors............................................. 39
Doors ............................................................ 25 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 26 EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................40
KEYS ......................................................................13 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 26 Multifunction Lever .................................... 40
Key Fobs ...................................................... 13 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 26 Headlight Switch.......................................... 40
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................15 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 27 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................16 Programming The Memory Feature............ 27 If Equipped................................................... 40
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition..................... 16 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless High/Low Beam Switch .............................. 40
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................17 Entry Key Fob To Memory ........................... 28 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 17 Memory Position Recall............................... 28 Equipped ...................................................... 40
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................ 18 SEATS ................................................................... 28 Flash-To-Pass............................................... 41
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 41
Equipped ...................................................... 19 Equipped ...................................................... 29 Headlight Time Delay .................................. 41
Remote Start Comfort Systems — Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 30 Lights-On Reminder..................................... 41
If Equipped .................................................. 19 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................. 42
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer If Equipped ................................................... 31 Turn Signals ................................................. 42
Activation — If Equipped .............................. 19 Front Heated Seats — If Equipped.............. 33 Lane Change Assist .................................... 42
Remote Start Abort Message — Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped......... 33 Battery Saver Feature ................................. 42
If Equipped ................................................... 20 Head Restraints .......................................... 34 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................42
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED....20 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION....................... 35 Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 42
To Arm The System ..................................... 20 Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 35 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............43
To Disarm The System ................................ 21 Basic Voice Commands............................... 36 Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 43
Rearming Of The System............................. 21 Get Started................................................... 36 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......... 44
Security System Manual Override .............. 21 Additional Information................................. 37 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..................... 45
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped .... 46
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................46 LIFTGATE ............................................................... 59 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .......84
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And Unlock/Open The Liftgate .......................... 59 Onboard Diagnostic System
Functions...................................................... 46 Lock/Close The Liftgate .............................. 60 (OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................. 84
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ....... 49 Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...................... 60 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Climate Voice Commands ........................... 50 Cargo Area Features ................................... 62 PROGRAMS ...........................................................84
Operating Tips ............................................. 50 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............ 64
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT..............52 STARTING AND OPERATING
Storage ......................................................... 52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR STARTING THE ENGINE........................................86
USB/AUX Control.......................................... 52 INSTRUMENT PANEL Normal Starting .......................................... 86
Power Outlets............................................... 53
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ....................................... 65 Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
Power Inverter — If Equipped ...................... 54
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 67 −30°C) ........................................................ 87
WINDOWS ............................................................55
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 67 Extended Park Starting ............................... 87
Power Window Controls............................... 55 After Starting — Warming Up The Engine... 87
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Automatic Window Features ...................... 55 If Engine Fails To Start ............................... 88
Controls ....................................................... 68
Reset Auto-Up .............................................. 56 Stopping The Engine ................................... 88
Oil Change Reset ......................................... 68
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 56 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..........88
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 69
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 56
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .........89
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
Message — Electrical Load Reduction PARK BRAKE.........................................................89
EQUIPPED .............................................................56
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 72 Electric Park Brake (EPB) ........................... 89
Opening And Closing The Sunroof .............. 57
TRIP COMPUTER .................................................. 74 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............................93
Venting Sunroof ........................................... 57
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................. 74 Ignition Park Interlock ................................. 94
Opening And Closing The Power
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 74 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Sunshade ..................................................... 58
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 78 System.......................................................... 94
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 58
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 81 Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 58
Green Indicator Lights................................. 82 Transmission ............................................... 94
HOOD .....................................................................59
White Indicator Lights ................................. 83 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
Opening The Hood ....................................... 59
Blue Indicator Lights.................................... 83 IF EQUIPPED..........................................................99
Closing The Hood ......................................... 59
Gray Indicator Lights ................................... 84 Jeep Active Drive ......................................... 99
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED...................... 100
Mode Selection Guide............................... 100
POWER STEERING............................................. 101 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA..............124 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................. 155
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 102 REFUELING THE VEHICLE..................................126 System Overview ......................................155
Autostop Mode...........................................102 VEHICLE LOADING ............................................127 Drag & Drop Menu Bar.............................. 157
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Certification Label .....................................127 Safety And General Information ............... 157
Autostop .....................................................102 TRAILER TOWING...............................................128 UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 158
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Common Towing Definitions .....................128 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................ 158
Mode...........................................................103 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Radio Mode ...............................................159
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start Weight Ratings) .........................................129 Media Mode ..............................................167
System........................................................104 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................130 Phone Mode ..............................................169
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start Towing Requirements ...............................130 ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
System........................................................104 Towing Tips ................................................133 EQUIPPED ........................................................... 181
System Malfunction...................................104 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND Android Auto™ .......................................... 181
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED 104 MOTORHOME) ...................................................133 Apple CarPlay®.......................................... 183
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................104 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — Vehicle ........................................................133 Tricks ..........................................................185
If Equipped .................................................106 Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF (FWD) Models.............................................134 IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 186
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 116 Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models .........134 Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................186
ParkSense Sensors ...................................116 DRIVING TIPS......................................................134 Introduction To Connected Vehicle
ParkSense Warning Display......................116 On-Road Driving Tips .................................134 Services .....................................................186
ParkSense Display.....................................116 Off-Road Driving Tips.................................135 Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........118 Services .....................................................188
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist MULTIMEDIA Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ...................... 190
System........................................................118 Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................138
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............119 Account ...................................................... 204
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................138
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....119
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................139
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 120
Customer Programmable Features ..........139
LaneSense Operation................................120
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................121
LaneSense Warning Message ..................121
Changing LaneSense Status.....................124
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 204 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................231 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ........................... 289
Connected Services SOS FAQs ................205 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....231 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 290
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/ Important Safety Precautions...................231 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 292
Unlock FAQs ..............................................205 Seat Belt Systems .....................................232 Without The Key Fob .................................293
Connected Services Roadside Assistance Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...240 Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models — With Key
FAQs ...........................................................206 Child Restraints .........................................255 Fob.............................................................. 293
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....206 SAFETY TIPS .......................................................267 4x4 Models ................................................ 293
Connected Services Vehicle Finder Transporting Passengers ..........................267 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ..... 293
FAQs ...........................................................206 Transporting Pets ......................................267 Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped .................. 294
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
FAQs ...........................................................206 Vehicle .......................................................267 (EARS) ................................................................ 295
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 295
FAQs ...........................................................207 Outside The Vehicle...................................269
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights Exhaust Gas ..............................................269 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FAQs............................................................207 Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................270
Connected Services Account FAQs...........208 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 296
Data Collection & Privacy ..........................210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Maintenance Plan ..................................... 297
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 210 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 300
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................271 2.4L Engine................................................ 300
Regulatory And Safety Information...........210 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ....271 Checking Oil Level .................................... 301
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................275 Adding Washer Fluid ................................301
SAFETY
Preparations For Jacking ..........................275 Maintenance-Free Battery ....................... 301
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 212 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage...........276 Pressure Washing......................................302
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................212 Jacking Instructions ..................................277
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...213 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...................280
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 221 JUMP STARTING .................................................285
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Preparations For Jump Start.....................286
If Equipped .................................................221 Jump Starting Procedure ..........................287
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF
Mitigation — If Equipped............................225 EQUIPPED ..........................................................288
Tire Pressure Monitoring System IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................289
(TPMS) ........................................................227
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................... 302 INTERIORS .........................................................349 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Engine Oil ..................................................302 Seats And Fabric Parts ..............................349
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
Engine Oil Filter..........................................303 Plastic And Coated Parts...........................350
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 357
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................303 Leather Surfaces .......................................350
Prepare For The Appointment .................. 357
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................303 Glass Surfaces ..........................................350
Prepare A List.............................................357
Body Lubrication ........................................304
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Be Reasonable With Requests ................. 357
Wiper Blades .............................................305
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 357
Exhaust System ........................................308 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER.................351
Cooling System ..........................................309 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................357
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ........... 357
Brake System ............................................312
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................351 Mexico ........................................................ 358
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....313
Torque Specifications................................351 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............358
Fuses ..........................................................314
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................352 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Bulb Replacement ....................................322
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................352 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................358
TIRES .................................................................. 330
2.4L Engine ................................................352 Service Contract .......................................358
Tire Safety Information .............................330
Reformulated Gasoline .............................352 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 359
Tires — General Information .....................337
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................353 MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 359
Tire Types ...................................................341
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles......353 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 359
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................342
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...353 In The 50 United States And
Snow Traction Devices .............................343
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Washington, D.C. .......................................359
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............345
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................353 In Canada...................................................359
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................354 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 360
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 345
Fuel System Cautions................................354 General Information.......................................... 360
Treadwear ..................................................345
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................355
Traction Grades .........................................346
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..................355
Temperature Grades .................................346
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..............356
STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 346
BODYWORK........................................................ 347
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......347
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........347
Preserving The Bodywork..........................348
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. 1
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read these publications
carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes
to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

These statements are against operating proce- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
WARNING! dures that could result in a collision, bodily vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center
injury and/or death. of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better
in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
These statements are against procedures that
CAUTION! vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if
could result in damage to your vehicle.
this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may
A suggestion which will improve installation, not.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
result in damage.
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
TIP:
use of the product or functionality. or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information per-
taining to the topic.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important Rollover Warning Label
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the
universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly Red Warning Lights
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Door Open Warning Light
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1
Ú page 76
WARNING! Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its Light
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in seri- Ú page 76
ous injury or death.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 76
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating Engine Temperature Warning Light
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Ú page 76
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 68. Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 77
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light Liftgate Open Warning Light

Ú page 74 Ú page 77
Brake Warning Light Oil Pressure Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light

10
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 75
Ú page 78
Transmission Fault Warning Light Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Yellow Warning Lights Low Coolant Level Warning Light

Ú page 79
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 78 Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 79
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 78 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Ú page 79
Light — If Equipped Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Ú page 78 Light (MIL)
Ú page 79
11
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped 1
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator Light
— If Equipped — If Equipped
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator
Equipped Light — If Equipped
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warn- Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator
ing Light Light
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
Equipped Green Indicator Lights
Ú page 81 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Tar-
get Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Indicator Lights Ú page 82
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Ú page 81 Detected Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82
4WD Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 81
Ú page 82
12
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 82
Ú page 83
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light Idle Coasting — If Equipped
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Ú page 82 Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 83
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82 With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 83
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Blue Indicator Lights
Ú page 82
High Beam Indicator Light
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 83
Ú page 82
Gray Indicator Lights

White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS  With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
KEY F OBS disabled. 2
3 — Emergency Key
Your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition 4 — Lock Button
key fob. 5 — Remote Start Button
The keyless ignition key fob supports Passive 6 — PANIC Button
Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter-N-Go (if equipped), Remote Start (if NOTE:
equipped), and remote power liftgate operation. In case the ignition switch does not change with
The keyless ignition key fob supports vehicles the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
equipped with a START/STOP ignition button. The or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
keyless ignition key fob also includes an can be verified by referring to the instrument
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the cluster, which will display directions to follow
key fob. Ú page 360.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
and liftgate from distances up to approximately Push and release the unlock button on the key
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. within five seconds to unlock all the doors and
NOTE: the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate,
push the lock button once.
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
result in poor performance.
Key Fob turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the Key Fob:

first push of the unlock button within Uconnect
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding
Settings Ú page 139.
the emergency key release (1) on the back
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob of the key fob and pull the emergency key
The replacement battery is one CR2032 out with your other hand.
battery.
NOTE:
 Customers are recommended to use a Separating Case With A Coin
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
 Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa- Emergency Key Removal
tion. 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are 2 — Emergency Key
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board. 2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry Key Fob Battery Replacement
the two halves of the key fob apart. Make 3. Remove the back cover to access and
sure not to damage the seal during removal. replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to
the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
may cause battery deterioration. If you Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing authorized dealer. This procedure consists of position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
alcohol. programming a blank key fob to the vehicle three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
electronics. remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
halves together. NOTE:
addition, if the light begins to flash after the 2
Programming And Requesting Additional  When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer bulb check, it indicates that someone
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
Key Fobs
you to an authorized dealer. fob. Either of these conditions will result in the
Programming the key fob may be performed by engine being shut off after two seconds.
an authorized dealer.  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks. If the vehicle security light turns on during
NOTE: normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it SENTRY KEY longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
another vehicle. unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
an authorized dealer.
engine. The system does not need to be armed
 Only key fobs that are programmed to the
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
vehicle electronics can be used to start and CAUTION!
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
compatible with some aftermarket remote
WARNING! ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
starting systems. Use of these systems may
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
 Always remove the key fobs from the result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the security protection.
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
vehicle unattended.
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off All of the key fobs provided with your new
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to start the engine. electronics.
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
NOTE: The push button ignition can be placed in the

A key fob that has not been programmed is also following modes:
considered an invalid key Ú page 360. OFF
IGNITION SWITCH  The engine is stopped.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION  Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,

alarm, etc.) are still available.
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button as long as the ON/RUN
key fob is in the passenger compartment.  Driving mode. Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
The START/STOP ignition button has three  All the electrical devices are available (e.g.
operating modes. The three modes are OFF,
WARNING!
climate controls, heated seats, etc.).
ON/RUN, and START.  When exiting the vehicle, always remove
START the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
 The engine will start. vehicle.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
NOTE:
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
If the ignition state/mode does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up tended is dangerous for a number of
method can be used to operate the ignition reasons. A child or others could be seriously
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the or fatally injured. Children should be
emergency key) of the key fob against the warned not to touch the parking brake,
START/STOP ignition button and push to brake pedal or the gear selector.
START/STOP Ignition Button
operate the ignition. (Continued)
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-

WARNING! (Continued) tion to the chime, the Vehicle On message WARNING! (Continued)
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the will display in the cluster.  Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED door locks or other controls could cause
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go serious injury or death. 2
This system uses the key fob to start
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate the engine conveniently from outside
power windows, other controls, or move the the vehicle while still maintaining HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART
vehicle. security. The system has a range of
Push and release the Remote Start button on
 Do not leave children or animals inside approximately 328 ft (100 m).
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
heat build-up may cause serious injury or weather and to reach a comfortable climate in flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
death. all ambient conditions before the customer programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
enters the vehicle. the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
CAUTION! mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the remote
NOTE:
start button a third time shuts the engine off.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehi- may reduce this range Ú page 360. To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and
cle and lock all doors when leaving the vehi- place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
cle unattended. WARNING! NOTE:
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed
NOTE:  With Remote Start, the engine will only run
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
for 15 minutes.
 For information on normal starting, see contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
Ú page 86. odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is  Remote Start can only be used twice.
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
 When opening the driver's door and the igni- death when inhaled.  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
tion is in the ON/RUN (engine not running) low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
(Continued)
position, a chime will sound to remind you to in 10 seconds.
 The park lamps will turn on and remain on  Vehicle Security system indicator flashing the vehicle is not equipped with a START/STOP
during Remote Start mode. ignition button, insert the mechanical key into
 Ignition in the OFF position
the ignition switch and place the ignition in the
 For security, power window and power
 Fuel level meets minimum requirement ON/RUN position.
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start  Vehicle Security system is not signaling an The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
mode. intrusion with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN  Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
position before the Remote Start sequence Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
can be repeated for a third cycle. WARNING! position, the climate controls will resume the
All of the following conditions must be met  Do not start or run an engine in a closed previously set operations (temperature, blower
before the engine will remote start: garage or confined area. Exhaust gas control, etc.).
 Gear selector in PARK contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is NOTE:
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
 Doors closed poisonous and can cause serious injury or  For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
death when inhaled. Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the igni-
 Hood closed
tion switch must be in the ON/RUN position
 Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
 Liftgate closed in order to drive the vehicle.
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
 Hazard switch off door locks or other controls could cause  For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
serious injury or death. Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not message “Remote Start Active — Insert Key
pushed) and Turn To Run” will show in the instrument
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE
 Battery at an acceptable charge level cluster display until you insert the key.
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
 PANIC button not pushed Start system, push and release the START/  For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
STOP ignition button while pressing the brake Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
 System not disabled from previous remote message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
pedal prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle. If
start event
Button” will show in the instrument cluster Settings Ú page 139. In warm weather, the  In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
display until you push the START/STOP igni- driver vented seat feature will automatically above, the climate settings will default to
tion button. turn on when the remote start is activated and MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation
is programmed in the comfort menu screen. on.
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
The vehicle will adjust the climate control
system will disable for two seconds after
settings depending on the outside ambient
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate 2
receiving a valid remote start request. control settings, see Ú page 46.
temperature.
REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If NOTE:
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED Equipped These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in
When remote start is active, and the outside The climate controls will automatically adjust to the ON/RUN position. The climate control
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the optimal temperature and mode settings settings will change, and exit the automatic
the system will automatically activate front depending on the outside ambient temperature. defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is This will occur until the ignition is placed in the while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once ON/RUN position where the climate controls will includes turning the climate controls off using
the timer expires, the system will automatically resume their previous settings. the OFF button.
adjust the settings depending on ambient Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems Equipped REMOTE START WINDSHIELD W IPER
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
 In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
DE–ICER A CTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED
operation.
below, the climate settings will default to When remote start is active and the outside
REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — maximum heat, with fresh air entering the ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
I F EQUIPPED cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate.
vehicle will enter Mix Mode. Exiting remote start will resume its previous
When remote start is activated, the front and operation, except if the Windshield Wiper
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
De-Icer is active. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
is active, the timer and operation will continue.
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed based on the last settings selected by the
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect driver.
REMOTE START A BORT M ESSAGE — I F VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  The Vehicle Security system does not monitor
glass breakage or the movement of objects
EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security system monitors the or people inside the vehicle. The alarm does
The following messages will display in the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless not intervene in the case of vehicle tilt varia-
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized tions when it is parked.
remote start or exits remote start prematurely: operation. While the Vehicle Security system is
armed, interior switches for door locks and TO ARM THE SYSTEM
 Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
liftgate release are disabled. If something Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
 Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open triggers the system, the Vehicle Security system system:
will provide the following audible and visible
 Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low signals: 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
 Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open in the OFF position.
 The horn will pulse
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To  The turn signals will flash make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
Reset
 The vehicle security light in the instrument system is OFF.
 Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold cluster will flash 2. Perform one of the following methods to
 Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired NOTE: lock the vehicle:
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To  Push the lock button on the interior
 The Vehicle Security system is factory
Reset power door lock switch with the driver
adjusted to standards from different coun-
and/or passenger door open.
The message will stay active until the ignition is tries.
placed in the ON/RUN position.  Push the lock button on the exterior
 The Vehicle Security system is a complemen-
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
tary security system developed to hinder the
key fob available in the same exterior
occurrence of vehicle theft and prevent
zone Ú page 22.
vandalism. It does not prevent the theft of
your vehicle; the system is a deterrent.  Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the  The Vehicle Security system remains armed REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM
vehicle security light (located in the lower left during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
portion of the instrument cluster display) will gate button will not disarm the Vehicle Secu- If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
begin to flash every three seconds until it is rity system. If someone enters the vehicle taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
disarmed. through the liftgate and opens any door, the will turn the horn off after approximately
alarm will sound. 90 seconds, and then the Vehicle Security 2
NOTE: system will rearm itself.
If the system is armed by pushing the lock  When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
button on the interior door panel, the vehicle the interior power door lock switches will not SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE
security light will flash rapidly for about 15 unlock the doors. The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
seconds once the door is closed, then slow The Vehicle Security system is designed to lock the doors using the manual door lock.
down to every three seconds. protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
DOORS
TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM
alarm. If one of the previously described arming MANUAL D OOR L OCKS
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
using any of the following methods: system will arm regardless of whether you are in The door locks can be manually locked from
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob.
 Push the unlock button on the key fob.
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
 Grab the passive entry door handle to unlock occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. each door trim panel forward until the lock
the door Ú page 22. indicator is shown. To unlock the front doors,
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the pull the inside door handle to the first detent or
 Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle rotate the door lock button until the lock
disarm the system. Security system will remain armed when the indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors,
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will rotate the door lock button until the lock
NOTE:
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, indicator is hidden. If the door lock button is
 The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate disarm the Vehicle Security system.
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
locked (lock indicator visible) when you shut the

door, the door will remain locked. Therefore, WARNING! (Continued)
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
before closing the door. with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
NOTE:
tended is dangerous for a number of
 Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the reasons. A child or others could be seriously
Vehicle Security system. or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
 The manual door locks will not lock or unlock brake pedal or the gear selector.
the liftgate. Power Door Lock Switch
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the If you push the power door lock switch while the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and any door
WARNING! dren, and do not leave the ignition of a or the liftgate is open, the power locks will not
 For personal security and safety in the vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — operate. This prevents you from accidentally
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN position. A locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing the
before you drive as well as when you park child could operate power windows, other ignition in the OFF position or closing the doors
and exit the vehicle. controls, or move the vehicle. and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your POWER D OOR L OCKS KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless E NTRY
The power door lock switches are located on
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
the keyless ignition is in the OFF position, the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
unlock the doors and liftgate.
remove the key fob from the vehicle and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.
lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle equipment may cause severe vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
personal injuries or death. fob lock or unlock buttons.
(Continued)
NOTE: Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key

(FOBIK-Safe)
 Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 139. To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
 The key fob may not be able to be detected by vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
the Passive Entry system if it is located next 2
with an automatic door unlock feature which
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
device; these devices may block the key fob’s position.
wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking and unlocking the There are three situations that trigger a
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
vehicle. FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
 If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
 If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ programmed, all doors and the liftgate will  A lock request is made by a valid Passive
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, unlock when you grab hold of the front Entry key fob while a door is open.
the unlock sensitivity can be affected, driver’s door handle. You can select between  A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
resulting in a slower response time. “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock door handle while a door is open.
All Doors 1st Press” within Uconnect Settings
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry Ú page 139.  A lock request is made by the door panel
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the switch while the door is open.
vehicle will re-lock and, if equipped, will arm  All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
the Vehicle Security system. front passenger door handle is grabbed When any of these situations occur, after all
regardless of the driver’s door unlock prefer- open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or ence setting. be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
Passenger’s Side inside the vehicle and it does not find any
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft Passive Entry key fobs outside the vehicle, then
(1.5 m) of either front door handle, grab the the vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
door handle to unlock the door automatically.
NOTE: NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
 After pushing the door handle button, you
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
when any of the following conditions are true:
door handle. This is done to allow you to
 The doors are manually locked using the door check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
lock knobs. door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
 Three attempts are made to lock the doors  If Passive Entry is disabled using the
using the door panel switch and then the Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Uconnect settings, the key protection
doors are closed. described in "Frequency Operated Button
NOTE: Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/
 There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the functional.
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either door handle lock button. This could unlock the
Passive Entry door handle. door(s).  The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
push the Passive Entry lock button located on into the electronic liftgate release handle. With
the outside door handle to lock the vehicle a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
doors and liftgate. of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate
release handle to open.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

2. All doors are closed.

3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
2
CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — R EAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Child-Protection Door Lock Function
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
Location
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock NOTE:
To Lock The Liftgate system.
 When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft To use the system, open each rear door, use a is engaged, the door can be opened only by
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and using the outside door handle even though
lock button located to the right of the electronic rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
liftgate release handle. When the system on a door is engaged, that tion.
NOTE: door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the  After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
unlocked position. Lock system, always test the door from the
doors and the liftgate Ú page 360.
inside to make certain it is in the desired
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT position.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles  After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
with power door locks if: system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.  For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the door lock button until the lock indi-
cator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — I F

the window, and open the door with the
EQUIPPED
outside door handle.
The steering wheel contains a heating element
WARNING! that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli- temperature setting. Once the heated steering
sion. Remember that the rear doors can only wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
be opened from the outside when the the operator turns it off. The heated steering
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
NOTE: To unlock the steering column, push the control The heated steering wheel control button is
Always use this device when carrying children. handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the located on the center instrument panel below
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, steering column, move the steering wheel the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
check for effective engagement by trying to upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or controls screen of the touchscreen.
open a door with the internal handle. Once the shorten the steering column, pull the steering  Press the heated steering wheel button
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To once to turn the heating element on.
it is impossible to open the doors from inside lock the steering column in position, push the
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be control handle upward until fully engaged.  Press the heated steering wheel button a
sure to check that there is no one left inside. second time to turn the heating element off.
WARNING!
STEERING WHEEL Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ing. Adjusting the steering column while driving steering wheel to operate.
or driving with the steering column unlocked,
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column could cause the driver to lose control of the For information on use with the Remote Start
upward or downward. It also allows you to vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may system, see Ú page 19.
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/ result in serious injury or death.
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
WARNING!
 Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped) PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE
 A set of desired radio station presets To create a new memory profile, perform the
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic following:
NOTE:
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica- Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one NOTE:
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys- key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and Saving a new memory profile will erase an
2
ical conditions must exercise care when the other key fob can be linked to memory posi- existing profile from memory.
using the steering wheel heater. It may tion 2.
cause burns even at low temperatures, 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON
especially if used for long periods. The memory setting switch is located on the position.
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
 Do not place anything on the steering wheel 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
three buttons:
that insulates against heat, such as a preferences (i.e., seat and radio station
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type  The set (S) button, which is used to activate presets).
and material. This may cause the steering the memory save function.
wheel heater to overheat. 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
 The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to memory switch, then push memory button
recall either of two pre-programmed memory (1) within five seconds. The instrument
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED profiles. cluster display will display which memory
Your key fob can be programmed to recall the position is being set.
same positions when the unlock button is
If desired, a second memory profile can be
pushed. This feature allows the driver to store
stored into memory as follows:
up to two different memory profiles for easy
recall through a memory switch. Each memory 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON
profile contains desired position settings for the position.
following features:
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
 Driver seat position preferences (i.e., seat and radio station
presets).
Memory Switches
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the  To recall the memory settings for driver two,
memory switch, then push memory button memory switch, then within five seconds push memory button (2) or the unlock button
(2) within five seconds. The instrument push and release the button labeled (1) or on the key fob linked to memory position 2.
cluster display will display which memory (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
position is being set. 2) will display in the instrument cluster
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
display.
NOTE: When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle 4. Push and release the lock button on the key stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to fob within 10 seconds. before another recall can be selected.
recall a memory profile.
NOTE: SEATS
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
KEYLESS ENTRY KEY F OB T O M EMORY settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed System of the vehicle.
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be within 10 seconds. WARNING!
programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles with a push MEMORY POSITION R ECALL  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
of the unlock button on the key fob. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
NOTE: people riding in these areas are more likely
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory to be seriously injured or killed.
Before programming your key fob you must positions. If a recall is attempted when the
select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in  Do not allow people to ride in any area of
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139. the instrument cluster display. your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
To program your key fob, perform the following:  To recall the memory settings for driver one, in these areas are more likely to be seri-
push memory button (1) or the unlock button ously injured or killed.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF on the key fob linked to memory position 1.
position.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) WARNING!

— IF EQUIPPED
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
Adjustment could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or 2
Some models may be equipped with a manual
death.
front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by  Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result Seat Height Adjustment
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
Equipped
desired position and release the lever. To return
The driver’s seat height can be raised or the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
lowered by using a lever, located on the release the lever.
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the
lever to raise the seat height or push downward
on the lever to lower the seat height.
Front Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Recline Lever
NOTE: 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With

WARNING! You may experience deformation in the seat Fold-Flat Feature
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats To provide additional storage area, each rear
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against are left folded for an extended period of time. seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
your chest. In a collision you could slide under This is normal and by simply opening the seats cargo space and still maintains some rear
the seat belt, which could result in serious to the open position, over time the seat cushion seating room.
injury or death. will return to its normal shape.
NOTE:
Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat — If WARNING! Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to position the front seat to its mid-track
Equipped Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is position. Also, be sure that the front seats are
This feature allows for extended cargo space. dangerous. The sudden movement of the fully upright and positioned forward. This will
When the seat is folded flat, it is an extension of seat could cause you to lose control. Adjust allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
the load floor surface (allowing long cargo to fit any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
from the rear hatch up to the instrument panel).
WARNING!
The fold-forward seatback has a softback MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
surface that you cannot use as a work surface  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
when the seat is folded forward and the vehicle area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
WARNING!
is not in motion. collision, people riding in these areas are
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold
top of the seatback. This could impair visibil-
the seat.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of
ity or become a dangerous projectile in a sud- your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
den stop or collision. and seat belts.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
To Lower The Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on The release lever will show a red indicator while
either side of the upper outer edge of the in the unlocked position. Once the seat is
seat. locked in, the red indicator will no longer be
visible. 2
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
Power Seat Switch
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
and/or passengers. An improperly latched The seat can be adjusted both forward and
seat could cause serious injury. rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of
Rear Seat Release Lever the switch. Release the switch when the desired
POWER ADJUSTMENT (F RONT SEATS) —
1 — Seat Belt Guide position has been reached.
2 — Seatback Release Lever I F E QUIPPED
Height Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a power
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback driver's seat and/or power passenger seat. The The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
completely forward. power seat switch and power seat recliner down. Pull upward or push downward on the
switch are located on the outboard side of the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction
To Raise The Rear Seat of the switch. Release the switch when the
seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to
NOTE: adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward desired position is reached.
If interference from the cargo area prevents the position. Use the power seat recline switch to
seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi- adjust the angle of the seatback.
culty returning the seat to its proper position.
Tilt Adjustment
WARNING!
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the front of the seat switch and the front of the the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
seat cushion will move in the direction of the your chest. In a collision you could slide under
switch. the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The seatback can be reclined both forward and Vehicles equipped with power driver or Power Lumbar Switch
rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward passenger seats may be equipped with power
or rearward. The seatback will move in the
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the outboard side of the power seat. Push the This feature provides automatic driver seat
the desired position has been reached. switch forward to increase the lumbar support. positioning to enhance driver mobility when
Push the switch rearward to decrease the entering and exiting the vehicle.
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward The distance the driver seat moves depends on
on the switch will raise and lower the position of where you have the driver seat positioned when
the support. you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
 When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
Power Seat Recliner Switch
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
 The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled  Press the heated seat button a second
when the driver seat position is less than WARNING!
time to turn the LO setting on.
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to  Press the heated seat button a third time skin because of advanced age, chronic
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or to turn the heating elements off. illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
Easy Entry. tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys- 2
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic
ical condition must exercise care when
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry temperature controls with an integrated center
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each stack, or manual temperature controls, you’ll
even at low temperatures, especially if
memory setting profile of the Driver Memory find the heated seat switches on the switch
used for long periods of time.
Settings Ú page 27. bank below the radio screen.
 Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
NOTE: If the HI level setting is selected, the system will back that insulates against heat, such as a
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when automatically switch to LO level after blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The approximately 60 minutes of continuous heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later operation. At that time, the display will change been overheated could cause serious
disabled) through the programmable features from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO burns due to the increased surface
in the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139. level setting will turn off automatically after temperature of the seat.
approximately 45 minutes.
FRONT HEATED S EATS — I F E QUIPPED
NOTE: FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — I F
The front heated seats control buttons are The engine must be running for the heated
located within the Uconnect system. You can
E QUIPPED
seats to operate.
gain access to the control buttons through the Located in the seat cushion and seat back are
climate screen or the controls screen. For information on use with the Remote Start fans that draw the air from the passenger
system, see Ú page 19. compartment and move air through fine
 Press the heated seat button once to turn
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
the HI setting on.
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are base of the head restraint, and push downward
located within the Uconnect system. You can
WARNING! on the head restraint.
gain access to the control buttons through the  All occupants, including the driver, should
climate screen or the controls screen. not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
 Press the ventilated seat button once to their proper positions in order to minimize
choose HI. the risk of neck injury in the event of a
 Press the ventilated seat button a second crash.
time to choose LO.  Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
 Press the ventilated seat button a third vehicle with the head restraints improperly
time to turn the ventilated seat off. adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision. Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
seats to operate. NOTE: top of the head restraint toward the front of the
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
For information on use with the Remote Start rear of the head restraint face forward) in an head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
system, see Ú page 19. attempt to gain additional clearance to the back restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
HEAD R ESTRAINTS of your head.
rear most position.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk Front Head Restraint Adjustment
of injury by restricting head movement in the NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with front four way
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should The head restraints should only be removed by
driver and passenger head restraints.
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the If either of the head restraints require removal,
is located above the top of your ear.
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, see an authorized dealer.
push the adjustment button, located at the
NOTE:
WARNING! The head restraints should only be removed by
 All occupants, including the driver, should qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s If either of the head restraints require removal,
seat until the head restraints are placed in see an authorized dealer.
their proper positions in order to minimize 2
the risk of neck injury in the event of a WARNING!
crash.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
 Head restraints should never be adjusted in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button pants.
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision. UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions: up Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
or down. When the center seat is being these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
occupied, the head restraint should be in the Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
raised position. When there is no occupant in control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
the center seat, the head restraint can be system.
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS  Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
The basic Voice Commands below can be given then say your Voice Command.
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
 You can interrupt the help message or
Push the VR button . After the beep, say: system prompts by pushing the VR button
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session. and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display  “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET S TARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system. Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: 1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
passenger conversations are examples of
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
noise that may impact recognition.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted NOTE:

while set in the day position (toward the The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar windshield). disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and improve the driver’s rear view. If your vehicle is
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US equipped with an on/off button on the mirror,
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. the mirror will be defaulted to on and can be 2
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are turned on/off through the touchscreen.
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 360. You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
For Uconnect system support, call
base of the mirror (if equipped). If your vehicle
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
is not equipped with an on/off button, the auto
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
dimming feature is always on.
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the
Manual Mirror — If Equipped windshield button with a counter clockwise
rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the rearview mirror can be adjusted left and right, or
windshield with a counter clockwise rotation. tilted up and down. The mirror should be
No tools are needed for mounting. The rearview adjusted to center on the view through the rear
mirror can be adjusted left and right, or tilted up window.
and down. The mirror should be adjusted to Automatic Dimming Button
center on the view through the rear window. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If

CAUTION! WARNING!
Equipped
To avoid damage to the mirror during clean- The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas-
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor senger side convex mirror will look smaller
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a to block out the sun. and farther away than they really are. Relying
clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. too much on your passenger side convex mir-
1. Fold down the sun visor. ror could cause you to collide with another
I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
one of the visors and lift the mirror cover.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage. POWER A DJUSTMENT M IRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the
NOTE:
driver’s door panel.
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional To adjust an exterior power mirror, select the
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle. right or left side using the mirror selector switch,
then push the mirror adjustment switch in the
OUTSIDE MIRRORS desired direction indicated by the direction
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the arrows.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve NOTE:
the optimal view.
 To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must
NOTE: be in the ON/RUN position.
The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and espe-  Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the
cially of the lane next to your vehicle. control to the neutral position to avoid acci-
dental movements.
 The mirrors are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
 The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion. 2
 The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
Power Mirror Switch Folding Exterior Mirror unfold them by pushing the button (this may
1 — Mirror Selector Switch Power Folding Mirror — If Equipped require multiple attempts). This resets them to
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch Power folding mirrors can be folded rearward their normal driving position.
3 — Power Folding Mirror Switch (If Equipped) and unfolded into the normal driving position. Puddle Lamps — If Equipped
FOLDING MIRRORS The switch for the power folding mirrors is Located under the exterior mirrors is a small
located between the power mirror switches L lamp that illuminates the ground when the
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the doors are unlocked with the key fob or when the
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid mirrors will fold in. Push the switch a second doors to the vehicle are open.
damage. The mirror has three detent positions: time and the mirrors will return to the normal
full forward, normal and full rearward. driving position. HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors whenever you turn on the rear window
if the following occurs: defroster (if equipped) Ú page 46.
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS headlamps are turned on or the ignition is

placed in the OFF position.
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER NOTE:
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate or reduce intensity on
Headlight Switch one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
1 — Rotate Headlight Control activated on that side), or on both sides of
2 — Ambient Lighting Control the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control are activated).
Multifunction Lever
4 — Front Fog Light Switch
The multifunction lever controls the operation HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH
of the turn signals, headlight beam selection Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the Push the multifunction lever toward the
and passing lights. The multifunction lever is first detent for parking light and instrument instrument panel to switch the headlights to
located on the left side of the steering column. panel light operation. Rotate the headlight high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
switch to the second detent for headlight,
HEADLIGHT SWITCH back will turn the low beams on.
parking light and instrument panel light
The headlight switch is located on the left side operation. AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — I F CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument EQUIPPED The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if system provides increased forward lighting at
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when night by automating high beam control through
equipped). the engine is started and remain on unless the the use of a digital camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from clockwise to the last detent for automatic If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
high beams to low beams until the approaching headlight operation. When the system is on, the they will turn off in the normal manner.
vehicle is out of view. headlight time delay feature is also on. This
NOTE:
means the headlights will stay on for up to
NOTE:
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the  The lights must be turned off within 45
 The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF 2
can be turned on or off through Uconnect move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position to activate this feature. If the head-
Settings Ú page 139. position. light switch is in the AUTO position prior to
placing the ignition in the OFF position, there
 Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and NOTE:
is no need to turn the headlight switch to off
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will The engine must be running before the head-
to activate Headlight Delay.
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer lights will come on in the automatic mode.
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other  The headlight delay timing is programmable
obstructions on the windshield or camera HEADLIGHT TIME D ELAY through Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
lens will cause the system to function improp- To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
erly. LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds. If the headlights or parking lights are on after
FLASH-TO-P ASS the ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
You can signal another vehicle with your sound to alert the driver when the driver's door
in the OFF position while the headlights are still
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction is opened.
on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
seconds. The delay interval begins when the
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
headlight switch is turned off.
lever is released.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either
AUTOMATIC H EADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED turning the headlights or parking lights on, or
This system automatically turns the headlights placing the ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED TURN SIGNALS occur if the interior lights were switched on
manually or are on because a door is open.
The front fog light switch is built into the Move the multifunction lever up or down to
headlight switch. activate the turn signals. The arrows on each INTERIOR LIGHTS
side of the instrument cluster display flash to
show proper operation. I NTERIOR C OURTESY L IGHTS
NOTE: Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened, or when the dimmer
 If either light remains on and does not flash, control is rotated to its farthest upward position.
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. The front map/reading lights are turned on by
the switches in the center of the overhead
 A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the console.
instrument cluster display and a continuous
Fog Light Switch chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the on.
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the fog light button. To turn off the front LANE CHANGE ASSIST
fog lights, either push the fog lights button a
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
An indicator light in the instrument cluster signal will flash three times then automatically
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. turn off.
Overhead Light Switches
NOTE: BATTERY SAVER F EATURE
The fog lights will operate with the low beam To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is
headlights or parking lights on. However,
off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
switch is placed in the OFF position. This will interior lights were turned on manually or are on
the fog lights.
because a door is open. This includes the glove
compartment light and the cargo area light. To Ambient Light Control — If Equipped front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
restore interior light operation, either place the Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or located on the end of the lever. For information
ignition in the ON/RUN position, or push the downward to increase or decrease the on the rear wiper/washer, see Ú page 45.
light switch on and then back off. brightness of the ambient light located in the
overhead console, door handle lights, lights
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control 2
under the instrument panel, door map pocket
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of
lights, and cubby bin lights.
the headlight switch and is located on the
driver’s side of the instrument panel. Ambient lights are only enabled when the
headlights are active.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or
down will adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights ONLY when the parking
lights or headlights are turned on, AND ONLY if
the built in cluster light sensor determines that Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
the ambient light levels are low enough that the WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION
backlighting should be enabled.
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two
detent positions for intermittent settings. The
first intermittent wiper interval is 10 seconds.
The second intermittent wipe interval is based
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer on vehicle speed. Rotate to the third detent for
low wiper operation and the fourth detent for
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS high wiper operation.
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the windshield wiper/washer lever
on the right side of the steering column. The
Instrument Panel Dimmer
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the on the windshield. The wash function must be
off position, the wipers will operate for several used in order to spray the windshield with
wipe cycles, then turn off. washer fluid.
NOTE: For information on wiper care and replacement,
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if see Ú page 305.
the switch is held for more than 20 to 30
seconds. Once the lever is released the pump
RAIN S ENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
will resume normal operation. This feature senses rain or snow fall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
Windshield Wiper Operation wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
WARNING!
lever to one of two detent positions to activate
CAUTION! Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
this feature.
Always remove any buildup of snow that pre- shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
vents the windshield wiper blades from
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
returning to the “park” position. If the wind-
freezing weather, warm the windshield with position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
shield wiper switch is turned off, and the
the defroster before and during windshield delay position two is the most sensitive. Place
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
washer use. the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
using the system.
Windshield Washer Operation Mist NOTE:
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and Push the lever upward to the MIST position and  The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled release for a single wiping cycle. when the wiper switch is in the low or
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will high-speed position.
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after NOTE:
the lever is released, and then resume the The mist feature does not activate the washer  The Rain Sensing feature may not function
intermittent interval previously selected. pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or operator is in the vehicle and has placed the Rotate the center portion of the lever
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor- ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain upward to the first detent for
mance. Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has intermittent operation and to the
been selected, and no other inhibit condi- second detent for continuous rear
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
tions (mentioned previously) exist. wiper operation.
and off through Uconnect Settings 2
Ú page 139. REAR WINDOW W IPER/WASHER To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is
The Rain Sensing system has protection The rear wiper/washer controls are located on desired. If the lever is pushed while
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right the wiper is in the off position, the
not operate under the following conditions: side of the steering column. The rear wiper/ wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then
 Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is washer is operated by rotating a switch, located turn off.
in Rain Sensing mode and the ignition is at the middle of the lever.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent
cycled from OFF to ON, the auto wiper will be The rear wiper/washer controls are located on setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for
suppressed until vehicle speed is greater the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper switch is side of the steering column. The rear wiper has released, and then resume the intermittent
moved out of and back into the Intermittent different operation modes: interval previously selected.
wipe position.
 Intermittent mode
NOTE:
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The
Rain Sensing system will not operate if the  Synchronous mode (at half speed of the front
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
NEUTRAL gear is selected at speeds of window wiper) when the front window wiper
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds.
3 mph (5 km/h) or less unless the wiper is operating
Once the lever is released the pump will resume
switch is moved or the gear selector is moved  Continuous mode normal operation.
out of NEUTRAL.
 Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wiper is
 Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles active and the REVERSE gear is selected, the
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain wiper will turn on for one wipe
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
WINDSHIELD WIPER D E-ICER — IF CLIMATE CONTROLS

E QUIPPED The Climate Control system allows you to
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
under the following conditions: controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
 Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
the radio.
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally in the case of a cold weather manual AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
start with full front defrost, and when the DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
ambient temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Climate Controls
 Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield MAX A/C Button
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
Press and release the MAX A/C button
cally when the rear defrost is turned on and
on the touchscreen to change the
when the ambient temperature is below
current setting to the coldest output
41°F (5°C).
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
 Activation By Remote Start Operation (If illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
Equipped) — When remote start is active and button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
the outside ambient temperature is less than to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the
41°F (5°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer MAX A/C to exit.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate
shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
Controls NOTE:
resume previous operation except, if the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and opera- The MAX A/C button is only available on the
tion shall continue. touchscreen.
A/C Button can be used when outside conditions such as switch between manual override mode and
Press and release the A/C button on smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are automatic modes Ú page 49.
the touchscreen, or push the button present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the Front Defrost Button
on the faceplate to change the
touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that Press and release the touchscreen
current setting. The A/C indicator
could create fogging on the inside of the button, or push and release the 2
illuminates when A/C is ON.
windshield. The A/C can be deselected button on the faceplate, to change
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the manually without disturbing the mode control the current airflow setting to Defrost
operator to manually activate or deactivate the selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
air conditioning system. When the air mode may make the inside air stuffy and when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
conditioning system is turned on, dehumidified window fogging may occur. Extended use of this windshield and side window demist outlets.
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. mode is not recommended. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
If your air conditioning performance seems level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C maximum temperature settings for best
lead to excessive window fogging. The
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for windshield and side window defrosting and
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a defogging. When toggling the front defrost
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator mode button, the Climate Control system will
inside of the windshield.
and through the condenser. If the problem return to the previous setting.
persists, please contact an authorized dealer. AUTO Button
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button on the
Recirculation Button Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push and release the
faceplate, to change the current
touchscreen, or push the button on button on the faceplate, to turn on the
setting. The AUTO indicator illuminates
the faceplate, to change the system rear window defroster and the heated
when AUTO is on. This feature automatically
between recirculation mode and outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
controls the interior cabin temperature by
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator indicator illuminates when the rear window
adjusting distribution and amount of airflow.
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the defroster is on. The rear window defroster
Toggling this function will cause the system to
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Push the blue button on the faceplate be selected using either the blower control knob
CAUTION! or touchscreen or press and slide the on the faceplate or the buttons on the
Failure to follow these cautions can cause temperature bar towards the blue touchscreen.
damage to the heating elements: arrow button on the touchscreen for Faceplate
 Use care when washing the inside of the cooler temperature settings.
The blower speed increases as you turn the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window SYNC Button blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
cleaners on the interior surface of the
Press the SYNC button on the blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
touchscreen to toggle the Sync you turn the blower control knob
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is counterclockwise.
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water. illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC is Touchscreen
used to synchronize the passenger temperature
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or setting with the driver temperature setting. Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
abrasive window cleaners on the interior Changing the passenger temperature setting setting and the large blower icon to increase the
surface of the window. while in SYNC will automatically exit this blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
feature. pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window. Mode Control
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch- Mode Control regulates the airflow
Driver And Passenger Temperature
screen. distribution. The airflow distribution
Control Buttons
outlets are: instrument panel outlets,
These buttons provide the driver and passenger Blower Control floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
with independent temperature control. Blower Control is used to regulate the demist outlets.
Push the red button on the faceplate amount of air forced through the
Faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the Climate Control system. There are
temperature bar towards the red seven blower speeds available. Push the Mode Button to change the airflow
arrow button on the touchscreen for Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode distribution mode.
warmer temperature settings. to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
Touchscreen Floor Mode AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE C ONTROL

Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the Air comes from the floor outlets. A (ATC)
airflow distribution mode. slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost, side window Automatic Operation
Panel Mode demister outlets, and panel outboard
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or 2
Air comes from the outlets in the outlets.
the AUTO button on the touchscreen (if
instrument panel. Each of these
Mix Mode equipped) on the Automatic Temperature
outlets can be individually adjusted to
Control (ATC) Panel.
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of Air is directed through the floor,
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be defrost, and side window demister 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
moved up and down or side to side to regulate outlets. This setting works best in cold the system to maintain by adjusting the
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel or snowy conditions that require extra temperature control buttons. Once the
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust heat to the windshield. This setting is good for desired temperature is displayed, the
the amount of airflow from these outlets. maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on system achieves and automatically
the windshield. A slight amount of air is also maintains that comfort level.
Bi-Level Mode directed through the panel outboard outlets.
Air comes from the instrument panel 3. When the system is set up for your comfort
outlets and floor outlets. A slight Climate Control OFF Button level, it is not necessary to change the
amount of air is directed through the Press and release this button on the settings. You experience the greatest
defrost and side window demister touchscreen, or push and release the efficiency by simply allowing the system to
outlets. button on the faceplate to turn the function automatically.
Climate Control ON/OFF.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
NOTE: Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After cooling system is functioning properly and the
the beep, say one of the following commands: proper amount, type, and concentration of
 It is not necessary to move the temperature
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees” coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system 
mode during Winter months is not
automatically adjusts the temperature, “Set the passenger temperature to
 recommended, because it may cause window
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort 70 degrees” fogging.
as quickly as possible.
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may Vacation/Storage
 The temperature can be displayed in US or
only be used to adjust the interior temperature For information on maintaining the Climate
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to Control system when the vehicle is being stored
customer-programmable feature.
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if for an extended period of time, see
To provide you with maximum comfort in the equipped. Ú page 346.
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
OPERATING T IPS Window Fogging
blower fan remains on low until the engine
warms up. The blower increases in speed and NOTE: Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
transition into Auto mode. Refer to the chart at the end of this section for mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
suggested control settings for various weather windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
Manual Operation Override
conditions. increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
This system offers a full complement of manual Recirculation mode without A/C for long
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front Summer Operation periods, as fogging may occur.
ATC display will be turned off when the system The engine cooling system must be protected
is being used in the manual mode. with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide Outside Air Intake
proper corrosion protection and to protect Make sure the air intake, located directly in
CLIMATE VOICE C OMMANDS
against engine overheating. OAT coolant front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
keep everyone comfortable while you keep intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
moving ahead. Winter Operation plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
To ensure the best possible heater and Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
defroster performance, make sure the engine of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter  Activation By Rear Defrost

CONTROL
The climate control system filters out dust and The wiper de-icer activates automatically WEATHER
SETTINGS
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to ambient temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Turn (A/C) on and
have it replaced when needed. set the mode control
 Activation By Remote Start Operation Warm Weather 2
to the (Panel Mode)
Stop/Start System — If Equipped When the Remote Start is activated and the position.
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control outside ambient temperature is less than
Operate in (Bi-Level
41°F (5°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is Cool Sunny
system may automatically adjust airflow to Mode) position.
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their Set the mode control
be maintained upon return to an engine running to (Floor Mode)
condition. previous operation except, if the de-icer is Cool & Humid Condi-
active, the de-icer timer and operation will position and turn on
tions
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped continue. (A/C) to keep win-
dows clear.
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
Operating Tips Chart Set the mode control
element located at the base of the windshield.
CONTROL to the (Floor Mode)
It operates automatically once the following WEATHER position. If wind-
conditions are met: SETTINGS
Cold Weather shield fogging starts
 Activation By Front Defrost Set the mode control to occur, move the
to (Panel Mode) , control to the (Mix
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
(A/C) on, and Mode) position.
during a cold weather manual start with full
Hot Weather And blower on high. Roll
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
Vehicle Interior Is Very down the windows for
is below 41°F (5°C).
Hot a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT Console Storage Compartment USB/AUX C ONTROL

To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover. There is a USB and AUX Jack in the center
STORAGE
console. This feature allows an external device
Glove Compartment to be plugged into the USB or AUX ports.
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which
can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small Center Console USB Port
items. The center console can slide forward and 1 — USB Port
rearward for comfort. 2 — AUX Jack
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the WARNING! If equipped, there may also be another USB port
release handle.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console located on the back of the center console.
WARNING! compartment lid in the open position. Driving The USB port allows interaction with a
with the console compartment lid open may connected smartphone via Android Auto™ or
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove com- result in injury in a collision. Apple CarPlay® if the vehicle is equipped with a
partment in the open position. Driving with
Uconnect 4/4C NAV. The port is for charge only
the glove compartment open may result in
injury in a collision.
if the vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 4 with NOTE: In addition to the front power outlet, there may
7-inch Display, or Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With All accessories connected to the “battery” also be a power outlet located in the rear cargo
8.4-inch Display. powered outlets should be removed or turned area, if equipped.
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
2
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the out-
let and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Charge Only USB Port Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet — If Equipped
POWER O UTLETS The front power outlet is located on the center NOTE:
stack of the instrument panel. If equipped, the rear cargo area power outlet
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
can be switched from “ignition” only to constant
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
“battery” powered all the time. See an autho-
phones, small electronics and other low
rized dealer for details.
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is WARNING!
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are To avoid serious injury or death:
powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
 Only devices designed for use in this type of
position, while the outlets labeled with a
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
outlet.
and powered at all times. Front Power Outlet (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

 Do not touch with wet hands.  After the use of high power draw accesso-
 Close the lid when not in use and while ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
driving the vehicle. started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an length of time to allow the generator to
electric shock and failure. recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED Power Inverter Location

CAUTION!
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug
 Many accessories that can be plugged in located on the back of the center console to in the device. The outlet automatically turns off
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). when the device is unplugged.
power cellular phones, electronics and other
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the The power inverter is designed with built-in
low power devices requiring power up to
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
exceed this power limit, as will most power
engine from starting. automatically shut down. Once the electrical
tools.
 Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., device has been removed from the outlet the
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
degrade the battery even more quickly. overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
Only use these intermittently and with on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
greater caution.
(Continued)
WARNING!
The passenger door windows can also be AUTOMATIC WINDOW F EATURES
operated by using the single window controls on
To avoid serious injury or death: the passenger door trim panel. The window Auto-Down Feature
 Do not insert any objects into the recepta- controls will operate only when the ignition is in The driver and front passenger door power
cles. the ON/RUN position. window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period 2
 Do not touch with wet hands. To open the window part way, push the window
switch down briefly and release it when you of time, then release, and the window will go
 Close the lid when not in use. want the window to stop. down automatically.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an To stop the window from going all the way down
NOTE:
electric shock and failure. during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
The power window switches will remain active
switch briefly.
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
WINDOWS in the OFF position. Opening either front door Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
will cancel this feature. Lift the window switch up for a short period of
POWER W INDOW CONTROLS time and release; the window will go up
The time is programmable within Uconnect
The window controls on the driver's door control Settings Ú page 139. automatically.
all the door windows. To stop the window from going all the way up
WARNING! during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. switch briefly.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or To close the window part way, lift the window
in a location accessible to children, and do not switch briefly and release it when you want the
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with window to stop.
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Occu- If the window runs into any obstacle during
pants, particularly unattended children, can auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
become entrapped by the windows while oper- go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
ating the power window switches. Such entrap- the window switch again to close the window.
Power Window Controls ment may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH or partially open positions. This is a normal

Any impact due to rough road conditions may occurrence and can be minimized. If the
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly The window lockout switch on the driver's door buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the trim panel allows you to disable the window open the front and rear windows together to
switch lightly and hold to close the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
manually. disable the window controls, push and release with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
the window lockout switch (the indicator light on opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
the switch will turn on). To enable the window window.
WARNING!
controls, push and release the window lockout
There is no anti-pinch protection when the switch again (the indicator light on the switch POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
window is almost closed. To avoid personal will turn off).
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fin- IF EQUIPPED
gers and all objects from the window path The power sunroof switches are located between
before closing. the sun visors on the overhead console.
RESET A UTO-U P
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold Window Lockout Switch
the switch up for an additional two seconds WIND B UFFETING
after the window is closed.
Wind buffeting can be described as the Power Sunroof Switches
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open perception of pressure on the ears or a 1 — Power Shade Switch
the window completely and continue to hold helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle 2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
the switch down for an additional two may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows 3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
seconds after the window is fully open. down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
Pull the switch to close and release it within

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) one-half second and the sunroof will completely
 Never leave children unattended in a  Do not use the sunroof and its related parts close automatically from any position.
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked for supporting and/or grabbing purposes. During Express Open or Express Close
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near Serious personal injury may result to operation, any movement of the sunroof switch 2
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to fingers and other body parts as well as will stop the sunroof.
children. Do not leave the ignition of a damage to the sunroof.
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Manual Open/Close
in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu- OPENING A ND CLOSING THE SUNROOF Push and hold the switch to open. The sunroof
larly unattended children, can become will open to the comfort stop (partially opened)
entrapped by the power sunroof while oper- The sunroof has two programmed open
position and automatically stop. Push the
ating the power sunroof switch. Such positions, comfort stop position and full open
switch and hold it again, and the sunroof will
entrapment may result in serious injury or position. The comfort stop position has been
open to the full open position then
death. optimized to minimize wind buffeting when
automatically stop.
driving with side windows closed and sunroof
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being Pull and hold the switch to completely close the
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. open. If the sunshade is in the closed position
when initiating a sunroof open or vent sunroof from any position.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and command the sunshade will automatically open Any release of the switch during open or close
make sure all passengers are also properly to the half open position prior to the sunroof operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
secured. opening. sunroof will remain in a partially opened
Express Open/Close position until the switch is operated and held
 Do not allow small children to operate the
again.
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other Push the switch to open and release it within
body parts, or any object, to project through one-half second and the sunroof will open to the VENTING SUNROOF
the sunroof opening. Injury may result. comfort stop (partially opened) position and
Push and release the vent switch within
(Continued) automatically stop. Push the switch and release
one-half second and the sunroof will move from
it again, and the sunroof will open to the full
the closed position to the vent position. This is
open position then automatically stop.
called “Express Vent.” During Express Vent again, and the sunshade will open to the full the switch again will close both the sunroof and
operation, any movement of the switch will stop open position and stop automatically. sunshade completely.
the sunroof. Pull the sunshade switch to close and release it Any release of the switch will stop the
NOTE: within one-half second. If the sunroof is in movement and the sunshade will remain in a
When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial closed position, the sunshade will full close partially opened position until the switch is
open position, Express Vent operation is not automatically from any position. If the sunroof is pushed again.
available. You must push and hold the vent open or vented, the sunshade cannot be closed
beyond the half open position. Pulling the
PINCH PROTECT F EATURE
switch to cycle the sunroof from a slide open
position to the vent position. Sunroof move- sunshade switch when the sunshade is in the This feature will detect an obstruction in the
ment will stop if the switch is released prior to half open position will automatically close opening of the sunroof during Express Close
the sunroof reaching the vent position. sunroof prior to the sunshade closing. operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
During Express Open or Express Close sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
OPENING A ND CLOSING THE POWER operation, any movement of the sunshade automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
SUNSHADE switch will stop the shade. this occurs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch
and release to Express Close.
The sunshade has two programmed open Manual Open/Close
positions: half open and full open. When NOTE:
Push and hold the sunshade switch to open.
opening the sunshade from the closed position, If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
The sunshade will open to the half open
the sunshade will always stop at the half open result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
position and stop automatically. Push and hold
position regardless of express or manual will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
the switch again, and the sunshade will open to
operation. The switch must be pushed again to Manual Mode.
the full open position.
continue on to full open position.
Pull and hold the sunshade switch to close. If SUNROOF M AINTENANCE
Express Open/Close
the sunroof is in closed position, the sunshade Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
Push the sunshade switch to open and release will fully close from any position. If the sunroof to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
it within one-half second and the sunshade will is open or vented, the sunshade will close to the and clear out any debris that may have
open to the half open position and stop half open position and stop. Pulling and holding collected in the tracks.
automatically. Push the switch and release it
HOOD CAUTION!
OPENING T HE HOOD To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
1. Pull the hood release lever located close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both 2
underneath the driver’s side of the latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
instrument panel. fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location LIFTGATE

CLOSING THE H OOD UNLOCK/OPEN THE L IFTGATE
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from The liftgate may be released in one of several
the point where the props no longer hold the ways:
hood open.
 Key fob
WARNING!  Outside handle
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driv-  Button on overhead console
Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel)
ing your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
safety latch release lever is located behind motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
the front edge of the hood at the center. this warning could result in serious injury or
Reach in at the center of the hood with a death.
palm facing the ground. Once contact is
made with the safety latch release lever,
push it toward the passenger side of the
vehicle to fully release the hood.
The overhead console switch and key fob (if LOCK/CLOSE THE L IFTGATE POWER L IFTGATE — IF E QUIPPED
equipped) will release the liftgate when the
liftgate is unlocked or locked. The outside To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate The power liftgate may be opened by
handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. closing handle and pull in a downward motion to pushing the liftgate button on the key
close the liftgate. fob. Push the liftgate button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to
open or close the power liftgate. You can also
open the liftgate by pushing the electronic
liftgate release handle Ú page 22.
Using any of the above ways:
 When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open.
 When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
Liftgate Entry close.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate
To Unlock The Liftgate  When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
Use the key fob or the interior door unlock NOTE: reverse.
button on the door panel to unlock the liftgate. Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate may The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
The manual door locks on the doors will not by pushing the liftgate button located on the
unlock the liftgate. be locked.
front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully
To Lock The Liftgate open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the
WARNING! liftgate button located on the left rear trim
Use the key fob or the interior door lock button
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi- on the door panel to lock the liftgate. The panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You manual door locks on the doors will not lock the button again will reverse the liftgate.
and your passengers could be injured by liftgate. When the liftgate button on the key fob is
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when pushed two times, the turn signals will flash
you are operating the vehicle. twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or
closing, and an audible chime can be heard (if  The power liftgate buttons will not operate if  If the electronic liftgate release handle is
enabled in the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139). the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is pushed a second time while the power lift-
above 0 mph (0 km/h). gate is opening, the liftgate motor will disen-
The key fob and the overhead console switch
gage to allow manual operation.
will open the liftgate when the liftgate is locked.  The power liftgate will not operate in
The outside handle requires the liftgate to be temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or  If your liftgate is power closing and you put 2
unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue
Passive Entry, and a valid Passive Entry key fob to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the to power close. However, vehicle movement
is within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pulling the liftgate before pushing any of the power lift- may result in the detection of an obstruction.
outside handle will unlock and open the liftgate. gate switches.
Lock The Vehicle
NOTE:  If anything obstructs the power liftgate while
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
it is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-
 Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
matically reverse to the closed or open posi-
possession of the key because the liftgate lock button located to the right of the electronic
tion. After multiple obstructions in the same
may be locked. liftgate release handle will lock the vehicle.
cycle, the liftgate will automatically stop and
 Use the interior door lock/unlock button on must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
the door panel or the key fob to lock and  There are also pinch sensors attached to the
unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on  Driving with the liftgate open can allow
side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
the doors and the exterior door lock cylinder along these strips will cause the liftgate to
will not lock and unlock the liftgate. You and your passengers could be injured
return to the open position. by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
 If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is  The power liftgate must be in the full open when you are operating the vehicle.
programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors position in order for the rear liftgate close  If you are required to drive with the liftgate
will unlock with a handle activation. If button, on the left rear trim near the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is opening, to operate. If the liftgate is not fully closed, and the climate control blower
programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the open, push the liftgate button on the key fob switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
liftgate will unlock. to fully open the liftgate and then push it recirculation mode.
again to close. (Continued)
full size spare tire. The center position is not Do not raise the floor beyond the point of
WARNING! (Continued) available in vehicles equipped with a full size resistance. In vehicles equipped with a power
 During power operation, personal injury or spare tire. liftgate, forcing the floor upward can damage
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the lift- the floor and vehicle’s trim panel.
To change the level of the load floor, pull
gate travel path is clear. Make sure the lift-
upward on the load floor handle, pull the floor
gate is closed and latched before driving
away. outward, and place the back of the floor into the
desired position. Lower the front of the floor into
 Personal injury or cargo damage may occur place.
if caught in the path of the liftgate. Make
sure the liftgate path is clear before acti-
vating the liftgate
CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Load Floor Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate)
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity 1 — Raised Floor Maximum Height
of 400 lbs (181 kg). 2 — Raised Load Floor
Cargo Load Floor Positions To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the
Cargo Load Floor Positions
The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three floor handle, pull the floor outward, then
1 — Upper Position position the floor upright with the bottom fitting
different levels to create more space in the
2 — Center Position on top of the floor positioning brackets. Push
cargo area. These positions are: upper, center,
3 — Lower Position the top of the floor down firmly to secure it in
and lower.
this position.
NOTE: Raising The Load Floor
The lower position is not available in vehicles To raise the load floor for access to the Tire
equipped with either a compact spare tire, or a Service Kit, or spare tire (if equipped), pull
upward on the load floor handle.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

 Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a  Place as much cargo as possible in front of
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and erly placed weight over or behind the rear
allow the child seat to come loose. A child axle can cause the vehicle to sway. 2
could be badly injured. Use only the
 Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
 To help protect against personal injury, bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
Fully Raised Load Floor Position passengers should not be seated in the sudden stop or accident.
To provide additional storage area, each rear rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended intended for load carrying purposes only, Rear Storage Bins
cargo space and still maintains some rear not for passengers, who should sit in seats
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of
seating room Ú page 28. and use seat belts.
the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
The weight and position of cargo and passen-
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops gers can change the vehicle center of gravity
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control
should be used to secure loads safely when the resulting in personal injury, follow these
vehicle is moving. guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim  Do not carry loads that exceed the load
panels. limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
 Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
Rear Storage Bin
forward as possible.
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

The load carried on the roof, when equipped Cargo must be securely tied down before driv-  Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs ing your vehicle. Improperly secured loads carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
over the cargo area. speeds, resulting in personal injury or prop- natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
Crossbars should always be used whenever erty damage. Follow the roof rack cautions add sudden upward lift. It is recommended
cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the when carrying cargo on your roof rack. to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
straps frequently to be sure that the load panels or surfboards, which may result in
remains securely attached. damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION!  Load should always be secured to cross-
NOTE:
 To avoid damage to the roof rack and bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
dealer through Mopar parts.
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy are intended as supplementary tie down
External racks do not increase the total load loads as evenly as possible and secure the points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the load appropriately. nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
total occupant and luggage load inside the  Long loads, which extend over the wind- frequently to be sure that the load remains
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do shield, should be secured to both the front securely attached.
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. and rear of the vehicle.
 Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
(Continued)
65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS  The pointer will likely indicate a higher 5. Fuel Gauge
temperature when driving in hot weather  The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
1. Tachometer or up mountain grades. It should not be fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions allowed to exceed the upper limits of the the ON/RUN position.
per minute (RPM x 1000). normal operating range.
 The fuel pump symbol points to the
2. Instrument Cluster Display
WARNING! side of the vehicle where the fuel door
 The instrument cluster display features a is located. 3
driver interactive display Ú page 68. A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam NOTE:
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
an authorized dealer for service if your vehi- when the ignition is first cycled.
cle overheats.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
CAUTION! Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
Driving with a hot engine cooling system to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera- opening/closing of a door will activate the
ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
Instrument Cluster Display Location vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi- or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back cluster display is designed to display important
3. Speedometer
into the normal range. If the pointer remains information about your vehicle’s systems and
 Indicates vehicle speed. on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately features. Using a driver interactive display
4. Temperature Gauge and call an authorized dealer for service. located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
 The temperature gauge shows engine
systems are working and give you warnings
coolant temperature. Any reading within
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
the normal range indicates that the engine
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
the main menus and submenus. You can  Trip  Down Arrow Button
access the specific information you want and
 Stop/Start (If Equipped) Push and release the down arrow button
make selections and adjustments.
to scroll downward through the main menu
 Audio
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY and submenus.
L OCATION AND CONTROLS  Messages  Right Arrow Button
The instrument cluster display features a driver  Screen Setup Push and release the right arrow button to
interactive display that is located in the access the information screens or submenu
 Vehicle Settings
instrument cluster. screens of a main menu item.
The systems allow the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons  Left Arrow Button
mounted on the steering wheel: Push and release the left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
 OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the OK
Instrument Cluster Display Location button for one second to reset displayed/
The instrument cluster display menu items selected features that can be reset.
consist of the following as equipped:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
OIL C HANGE R ESET
 Speedometer
 Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
 Up Arrow Button
 Vehicle Info change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Push and release the up arrow button to Due” message will display in the instrument
 Driver Assist scroll upward through the main menu and cluster display for five seconds after a single
 Fuel Economy submenus. chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY MENU 1. Tire Pressure
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
I TEMS  If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle
which means the engine oil change interval ICON is displayed with tire pressure
may fluctuate, dependent upon your NOTE: values in each corner of the ICON.
personal driving style. The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.  If one or more tires have low pressure,
 Unless reset, this message will continue to “Inflate Tire To XX” is displayed with the
display each time the ignition is cycled to the Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features Ú page 68. vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values 3
ON/RUN position. in each corner of the ICON with the pres-
To reset the oil change indicator after Speedometer sure value of the low tire displayed in a
performing the scheduled maintenance, refer different color than the other tire pres-
Push and release the up or down arrow
to the following procedure: sure value.
button until the Speedometer Menu item is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.  If the Tire Pressure system requires
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
Push and release the OK button to change the service, “Service Tire Pressure System” is
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
speedometer scale from MPH to km/h (or vice displayed.
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
versa).
start the engine).  Tire PSI is an information only function
Vehicle Info (Customer Information and cannot be reset Ú page 227.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds. Features) 2. Coolant Temperature
Push and release the up or down arrow Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
button until the Vehicle Info Menu item is
NOTE: displayed in the instrument cluster display. 3. Transmission Temperature — Automatic
If the indicator message illuminates when you Push and release the left or right arrow Transmission Only
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator button to cycle through the Vehicle Info Displays the actual transmission tempera-
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this submenus and follow the prompts on each ture.
procedure. screen as needed.
4. Oil Temperature NOTE: Driver Assist

Displays the level of oil temperature. Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
Push and release the up or down arrow
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
button until the Driver Assist menu title is
5. Battery Voltage distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed and highlighted in the instrument
Displays the actual battery voltage displayed value.
cluster display.
 Average – This display shows the average Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Fuel Economy fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow since the last reset.
button until the Fuel Economy menu title is The instrument cluster display displays the
 Current – This display shows the current fuel current ACC system settings. The information
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while displayed depends on ACC system status. Push
Push and hold the OK button to reset average
driving. the ACC on/off button (located on the steering
fuel economy feature.
 Idle Coasting (If Equipped) – The Idle wheel) until one of the following displays in the
 Range – The display shows the estimated instrument cluster display:
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with Coasting feature saves fuel by allowing
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the engine speeds to drop to idle. When Idle Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km) Coasting is active, the Idle Coasting Indicator
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
estimated driving distance, the Range Light is shown in the Instrument Cluster
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
display will change to a “LOW FUEL” Display.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel  Sport Mode (If Equipped) – Selecting Sport
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” mode will activate the configuration for When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
message and a new Range value will display. typical enthusiast driving. The Transmission, setting has not been selected, the display will
Range cannot be reset through the OK Stability Control, Steering, and Suspension read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Push and
button. systems are all set to their Sport settings. release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET Trip Info Audio

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow
the instrument cluster. button until the Trip menu title is displayed in button until the Audio menu title is displayed in
The ACC screen may display once again if any the instrument cluster display. Toggle the the instrument cluster display.
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of left or right arrow button to select Trip A
Stored Messages
the following: or Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following: Push and release the up or down arrow
 Distance Setting Change button until the Messages Menu Icon is
3
 Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
 System Cancel highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
This feature shows the number of stored
 Driver Override reset.
warning messages. Pushing the left or
 System Off  Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average right arrow button will allow you to scroll
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of through the stored messages.
 ACC Proximity Warning Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
ACC Unavailable Warning Screen Setup
  Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. Push and release the up or down arrow
NOTE:
button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
The instrument cluster display will return to the Hold the OK button to reset feature information. highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
last display selected after five seconds of no
Stop/Start – If Equipped Push and release the OK button to enter the
ACC display activity Ú page 106.
submenus and follow the prompts on the
Push and release the up or down arrow screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
LaneSense — If Equipped
button until the Stop/Start menu title is allows you to change what information is
The instrument cluster display displays the displayed in the instrument cluster display. displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
current LaneSense system settings. The
the location that information is displayed.
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met Ú page 120.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items  Range  Trip A Distance

Upper Left  Fuel Economy Average  Trip B Distance
 None Restore Defaults (Restores All Settings To  Speedometer
 Compass Default Settings)
BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER
 Yes
 Outside Temp MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD
 Date  No REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED
 Time Current Gear — If Equipped This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
 On Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
 Ignition State monitoring of the electrical system and status
 Off of the vehicle battery.
 Range
Center In cases when the IBS detects charging system
 Fuel Economy Average
 None failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
 Fuel Economy Current deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
 Compass will take place to extend the driving time and
Upper Right
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
 Menu Title
 None power to or turning off non-essential electrical
 Date loads.
 Compass
 Outside Temp Load reduction is only active when the engine is
 Outside Temp running. It will display a message if there is a
 Time risk of battery depletion to the point where the
 Date
 Range vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
 Time or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
 Fuel Economy Average
 Ignition State
 Audio Info
When load reduction is activated, the message  150W Power Inverter System  The battery was recently replaced and was
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will not charged completely.
 Audio and Telematics System
appear in the instrument cluster display.
 The battery was discharged by an electrical
These messages indicate the vehicle battery Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or load left on when the vehicle was parked.
has a low state of charge and continues to lose more of the following conditions:
electrical charge at a rate that the charging  The battery was used for an extended period
 The charging system cannot deliver enough
system cannot sustain. with the engine not running to supply radio,
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli- 3
NOTE: ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
the capability of charging system. The
and similar devices.
 The charging system is independent from charging system is still functioning properly.
load reduction. The charging system What to do when an electrical load reduction
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
performs a diagnostic on the charging action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
system continuously. or “Battery Saver Mode”)
interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12
 If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain During a trip:
may indicate a problem with the charging driving conditions (city driving, towing,
 Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
system Ú page 76. frequent stopping).
possible:
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if  Installing options like additional lights,
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be upfitter electrical accessories, audio
rior)
effected by load reduction: systems, alarms and similar devices.
 Check what may be plugged in to power
 Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
by long parking periods).
 Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped  Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
 The vehicle was parked for an extended ture)
 Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors period of time (weeks, months).
 HVAC System  Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip: Trip B in all cases. Always refer to the information in

 Check if any aftermarket equipment was  Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical since the last reset. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and The system check menu may appear different
 Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B based upon equipment options and current
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
since the last reset. vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
Off Draw currents).
may not appear.
 Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, Elapsed Time
driving time and parking time). Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the RED WARNING LIGHTS
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
 The vehicle should have service performed if Air Bag Warning Light
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
the message is still present during consecutive This warning light will illuminate to
ignition switch is in the ON/START position.
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and indicate a fault with the air bag, and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. To Reset A Trip Function will turn on for four to eight seconds
Reset will only occur while a resettable function as a bulb check when the ignition is
TRIP COMPUTER is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
Push and release the up or down arrow button to clear the resettable function being position. This light will illuminate with a single
button until the Trip A or Trip B icon is displayed. chime when a fault with the air bag has been
highlighted in the instrument cluster display detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
(Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES If the light is either not on during startup, stays
B). Push and release the OK button to display The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in on, or turns on while driving, have the system
the Trip information. the instrument panel together with a dedicated inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
message and/or acoustic signal when possible.
Trip A
applicable. These indications are indicative and Brake Warning Light
 Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
precautionary and as such must not be
since the last reset. This warning light monitors various
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
brake functions, including brake fluid
 Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A the information contained in the Owner’s
level and parking brake application. If
since the last reset. Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake NOTE: seconds. The light should then turn off unless
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light may flash momentarily during sharp the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
If the light remains on when the parking brake conditions. The vehicle should have service the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the performed, and the brake fluid level checked. The light also will turn on when the parking
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system necessary. ON/RUN position.
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake 3
NOTE:
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock WARNING! This light shows only that the parking brake is
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is applied. It does not show the degree of brake
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
dangerous. Part of the brake system may application.
until the condition has been corrected. If the
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehi-
problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
cle. You could have a collision. Have the vehi-
pump will run when applying the brake, and a
cle checked immediately. This warning light indicates when the
brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each
driver or passenger seat belt is
stop.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake unbuckled. When the ignition is first
The dual brake system provides a reserve placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
the ABS system is required.
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
dropped below a specified level. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be continuously and a chime will sound
checked by turning the ignition switch from the Ú page 231.
The light will remain on until the cause is
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
corrected.
should illuminate for approximately two
Battery Charge Warning Light If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
WARNING! running, immediate service is required and you
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If Continued operation with reduced assist could may experience reduced performance, an
it stays on while the engine is running, pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Ser- elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
there may be a malfunction with the vice should be obtained as soon as possible. vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
as soon as possible. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a
Light bulb check. If the light does not come on during
This indicates a possible problem with the starting, have the system checked by an
electrical system or a related component. This warning light will illuminate to authorized dealer.
indicate a problem with the ETC
Door Open Warning Light system. If a problem is detected while Engine Temperature Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a the vehicle is running, the light will This warning light will illuminate to
door is ajar/open and not fully closed. either stay on or flash depending on the nature of warn of an overheated engine
the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle condition. If the engine coolant
NOTE: is safely and completely stopped and the temperature is too high, this light will
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a transmission is placed in the PARK position. The illuminate and a single chime will sound.
single chime. light should turn off. If the light remains on with
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
Warning Light service as soon as possible.
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
This warning light will turn on when NOTE: vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
there's a fault with the EPS system This light may turn on if the accelerator and return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
Ú page 101. brake pedals are pressed at the same time. and call for service Ú page 289.
Hood Open Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light

WARNING!
This warning light will illuminate when This warning light will illuminate to
the hood is left open and not fully indicate the engine oil temperature is If you continue operating the vehicle when
closed. high. If the light turns on while driving, the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
stop the vehicle and shut off the is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
NOTE: over, come in contact with hot engine or
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels. exhaust components and cause a fire.
chime.
3
Liftgate Open Warning Light Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with CAUTION!
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open. a message in the instrument cluster Continuous driving with the Transmission
display and a buzzer) to indicate a Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
transmission fault. Contact an eventually cause severe transmission dam-
NOTE:
authorized dealer if the message remains after age or transmission failure.
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
restarting the engine.
chime.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Transmission Temperature Warning Light Equipped
Oil Pressure Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to This light will flash at a fast rate for
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the This warning light will illuminate to approximately 15 seconds when the
light turns on while driving, stop the warn of a high transmission fluid Vehicle Security system is arming,
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as temperature. This may occur with and then will flash slowly until the
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A strenuous usage such as trailer vehicle is disarmed.
chime will sound when this light turns on. towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
corrected. This light does not indicate how light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level continue to drive normally.
must be checked under the hood.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
This warning light will indicate when This warning light indicates the ESC is
Light the ESC system is Active. The ESC off.
This warning light monitors the ABS. Indicator Light in the instrument
The light will turn on when the ignition cluster will come on when the ignition Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
RUN position and may stay on for as position, and when ESC is activated. It should go if it was turned off previously.
long as four seconds. out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while Light comes on continuously with the engine Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake running, a malfunction has been detected in the This warning light will illuminate after
system is not functioning and service is ESC system. If this warning light remains on after an accident has occurred, and the
required as soon as possible. However, the several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been system has shut the fuel off.
conventional brake system will continue to driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Light is not also on. authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The LaneSense Warning Light will be
the problem diagnosed and corrected. solid yellow when the vehicle is
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
 The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- approaching a lane marker. The
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
cator Light come on momentarily each time warning light will flash when the
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
by an authorized dealer.
ON/RUN position. Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the This warning light will illuminate when
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. the LaneSense system is not
not functioning properly and service is
This light will come on when the vehicle is in operating and requires service.
required. Contact an authorized 
an ESC event. Please see an authorized dealer.
dealer.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
CAUTION!
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
Ú page 309. gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
the light after engine start. The vehicle should vehicle control system. It also could affect
Low Fuel Warning Light fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is
be serviced if the light stays on through several
Depending on whether the tank size is typical driving styles. In most situations, the flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
13.5 gal (51 L) or 15.8 gal (60 L), the vehicle will drive normally and will not require and power loss will soon occur. Immediate 3
Low Fuel Indicator Light will turn on towing. service is required.
when the fuel level goes below 1.5 gal
(5.6 L) or 1.7 gal (6.6 L) respectively. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
to alert serious conditions that could lead to Warning Light — If Equipped
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
This light will turn on when a ACC is
Equipped converter damage. The vehicle should be
not operating and needs service
This warning light will illuminate when serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
Ú page 106.
the windshield washer fluid is low. possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
WARNING! This warning light will illuminate to
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer- signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
Warning Light (MIL) the light stays on or comes on during
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
The MIL is a part of an Onboard than in normal operating conditions. This can driving, it means that the 4WD system
Diagnostic System called OBD II that cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over is not functioning properly and that service is
monitors engine and automatic flammable substances such as dry plants, required. We recommend you drive to the
transmission control systems. This wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in nearest service center and have the vehicle
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is death or serious injury to the driver, occu- serviced immediately.
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If pants or others.
the bulb does not come on when turning the
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Should one or more tires be in the condition tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
Light — If Equipped mentioned above, the display will show the the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
This warning light will illuminate to indications corresponding to each tire. underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
indicate a fault in the Forward and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
Collision Warning System. Contact an
CAUTION! reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
authorized dealer for service Do not continue driving with one or more flat may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
Ú page 225. tires as handling may be compromised. Stop ability.
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer- Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
If Equipped ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
This warning light will illuminate when contact an authorized dealer as soon as pos- even if underinflation has not reached the level
the Stop/Start system is not sible. to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
functioning properly and service is pressure telltale.
required. Contact an authorized Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
dealer for service. should be checked monthly when cold and
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
Warning Light malfunction indicator is combined with the low
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
The warning light switches on and a vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
message is displayed to indicate that indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
approximately one minute and then remain
the tire pressure is lower than the pressure label, you should determine the
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
recommended value and/or that slow proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, As an added safety feature, your vehicle has long as the malfunction exists. When the
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
not be guaranteed. low tire pressure telltale when one or more of may not be able to detect or signal low tire
your tires is significantly underinflated. pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale occur for a variety of reasons, including the
illuminates, you should stop and check your
installation of replacement or alternate tires or Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — If
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS Equipped Equipped
from functioning properly. Always check the This light illuminates when there is a Auto HOLD! keeps your vehicle at a
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or failure with the tow hook. Contact an complete stop without you having to
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure authorized dealer for service. keep your food on the brake pedal. If
that the replacement or alternate tires and a fault is detected, it will be indicated
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator light that will stay
properly. on as long as the fault condition exists. 3
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
CAUTION! This light alerts the driver that the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator
The TPMS has been optimized for the original vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode. The Light — If Equipped
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures front and rear driveshafts are This telltale will turn on to warn you of
and warning have been established for the mechanically locked together forcing a possible collision with the vehicle in
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir- the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same front of you.
able system operation or sensor damage may speed. Low range provides a greater gear
result when using replacement equipment reduction ratio to provide increased torque at Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
that is not of the same size, type, and/or the wheels Ú page 99. Indicator Light — If Equipped
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor 4WD Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light illuminates to
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may indicate that Forward Collision
This light alerts the driver that the Warning is off.
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
vehicle is in the 4WD LOCK mode. The
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
front and rear driveshafts are Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mechanically locked together, forcing Indicator Light
mended that you take your vehicle to an
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same This telltale will illuminate when the
authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
speed Ú page 99. Vehicle Security system has detected
tion checked.
an attempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE: keep your food on the brake pedal. Once Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi- engaged a green “HOLD” indicator will appear This indicator light will illuminate
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could in the Instrument Cluster Display. when the front fog lights are on
illuminate if a problem with the system is Ú page 40.
detected. This condition will result in the engine Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
being shut off after two seconds. Equipped Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the This indicator light will illuminate
GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS automatic high beam headlights are when the park lights or headlights are
on Ú page 40. turned on.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped Sport Mode Indicator Light
Equipped The LaneSense indicator light This light will turn on when Sport
This light will turn on when the illuminates solid green when both Mode is active.
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and lane markings have been detected
there is no vehicle in front detected and the system is “armed” and ready
Ú page 106. to provide visual and torque warnings if an Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
unintentional lane departure occurs. Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With This indicator light will illuminate
Target Detected Indicator Light — If Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If when the Stop/Start function is in
Equipped Equipped With A Premium Instrument “Autostop” mode.
This light will turn on when the Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and a
vehicle in front is detected when the Cruise Control is set to the When the left or right turn signal is
Ú page 106. desired speed Ú page 104. activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped corresponding exterior turn signal
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
complete stop without you having to when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE: LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped Speed Warning Indicator Light — If

 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is When the LaneSense system is ON, Equipped
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either but not armed, the LaneSense When Set Speed Warning is turned on
turn signal on. indicator light illuminates solid white. and when the set speed is exceeded,
This occurs when only left, right, or a single chime will sound along with a
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if neither lane line has been detected. If a single pop-up message of “Speed Warning
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. lane line is detected, the system is ready to Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional and off in the instrument cluster display. 3
WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light Ú page 120.
that can be set.
— If Equipped Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
This indicator shows when the HDC
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
feature is turned on. The lamp will be Cluster High Beam Indicator Light
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
This light will turn on when the Cruise This indicator light will illuminate to
only be armed when the transfer case
Control has been turned on, but not indicate that the high beam
is in the 4WD Low position and the vehicle
set Ú page 104. headlights are on. With the low beams
speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
activated, push the multifunction
conditions are not met while attempting to use Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
flash on/off.
This indicator light will illuminate lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
Idle Coasting — If Equipped when the Cruise Control is set turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
Ú page 104. off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
The Idle Coasting feature saves fuel
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
by allowing engine speeds to drop to
idle. When Idle Coasting is active, the
Idle Coasting Indicator Light is shown
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
GRAY I NDICATOR L IGHTS CAUTION! WARNING!

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could  ONLY an authorized service technician
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster cause further damage to the emission should connect equipment to the OBD II
This light will turn on when the Cruise control system. It could also affect fuel connection port in order to read the VIN,
Control has been turned on, but not economy and driveability. The vehicle must diagnose, or service your vehicle.
set Ú page 104. be serviced before any emissions tests can  If unauthorized equipment is connected to
be performed. the OBD II connection port, such as a
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated running, severe catalytic converter damage  Be possible that vehicle systems,
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
including safety related systems, could
system monitors the performance of the service is required.
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission could occur that may result in an acci-
control systems. When these systems are ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM dent involving serious injury or death.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
 Access, or allow others to access, infor-
excellent performance and fuel economy, as Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a mation stored in your vehicle systems,
well as emissions well within current connection port to allow access to information including personal information.
government regulations. related to the performance of your emissions
If any of these systems require service, the OBD controls. Authorized service technicians may
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator need to access this information to assist with EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
and other information to assist your service emissions system Ú page 138.
technician in making repairs. Although your In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as emissions control system. Failure to pass could
soon as possible. prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
and Maintenance (I/M), this check the ON position, you will see the see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on come on as part of a normal bulb check. failure or replacement, you may need to do
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
system is ready for testing. normally would in order for your OBD II system
things will happen:
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The to update. A recheck with the above test routine
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
 The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds may then indicate that the system is now ready. 3
and then return to being fully illuminated
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
engine. This means that your vehicle's
system should be determined not ready for the during normal vehicle operation you should
OBD II system is not ready and you
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/
should not proceed to the I/M station.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
which you can use prior to going to the test  The MIL will not flash at all and will because the MIL is on with the engine running.
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system remain fully illuminated until you place
is ready, you must do the following: the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, OBD II system is ready and you can
but do not crank or start the engine. proceed to the I/M station.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
86
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! (Continued)
Tip Start Feature
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, Place the ignition switch in the START position
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the and release it as soon as the starter engages.
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
fasten your seat belts. The starter motor will continue to run, and will
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a automatically disengage itself when the engine
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go is running. If the engine fails to start, place the
WARNING! in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
ignition switch in the OFF position, wait 10 to
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove operate power windows, other controls, or
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your move the vehicle.
procedure.
vehicle.  Do not leave children or animals inside
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior Automatic Transmission
with access to an unlocked vehicle. heat build-up may cause serious injury or The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or
death. PARK position before you can start the engine.
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
tended is dangerous for a number of
Start the engine with the gear selector in the gear.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range. CAUTION!
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear NORMAL STARTING Damage to the transmission may occur if the
selector. following precautions are not observed:
Place the ignition switch in the START position
(Continued)  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
and release when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position, above idle speed.
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal (Continued)
Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
positions, OFF, RUN, and START. To change the 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
CAUTION! (Continued) ignition switch positions without starting the to the battery to ensure a full battery
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only vehicle and use the accessories follow these charge during the crank cycle.
after the vehicle has come to a complete steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
stop. position:
release it when the engine starts.
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure 1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
once to change the ignition switch to the
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The 5 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
ENGINE START/STOP Button 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a repeat the “Extended Park Starting” 4
second time to change the ignition switch to procedure.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
the OFF position.
NEUTRAL. 4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts,
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (B ELOW allow the starter to cool for at least
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button –22°F O R −30°C)
once.
To ensure reliable starting at these CAUTION!
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle temperatures, use of an externally powered
fails to start, the starter will disengage electric engine block heater (available from an To prevent damage to the starter, do not
automatically after 10 seconds. authorized dealer) is recommended. crank continuously for more than 10 seconds
at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING again.
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
NOTE:
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
Extended Park condition occurs when the
AFTER S TARTING — WARMING UP THE
Keyless Enter-N-Go — With Driver’s Foot OFF vehicle has not been started or driven for at ENGINE
The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) least 30 days. The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates will decrease as the engine warms up.
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART WARNING! (Continued)

Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the
RUN position to the OFF position), the power
If the engine fails to start after you have supply to the accessories are maintained for a
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, and period of three minutes.
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
has not experienced an extended park automatic transmission cannot be started
condition as identified in “Extended Park Opening the driver side door with the ignition in
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the catalytic converter and once the engine has
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and driver to place the ignition to OFF.
started, ignite and damage the converter
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than and vehicle. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in window switches remains active for three
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition  If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this
key in the RUN position, release the accelerator booster cables may be used to obtain a
function.
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
procedure.
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 285. temperature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not con-
STOPPING THE ENGINE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
tinuously crank the engine for more than Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless The engine block heater warms the engine and
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds Enter-N-Go): permits quicker starts in cold weather.
before trying again. To shut off the engine with vehicle speed Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
WARNING! and hold the ignition or push the ENGINE cord.
START/STOP button three times consecutively
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
within a few seconds. The engine will shut
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an the engine block heater is recommended. For
down, and the ignition will be placed in the RUN
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),
position.
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. the engine block heater is required.
(Continued)
The engine block heater cord is routed under

the hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
PARK BRAKE
NOTE:
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
desirable.
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB system
 The engine block heater cord is a factory While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration that offers simple operation, and some
installed option. If your vehicle is not within the limits of local traffic laws contributes additional features that make the parking brake
equipped, heater cords are available from an to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle more convenient and useful.
authorized Mopar dealer. acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
The parking brake is primarily intended to
 The engine block heater will require 110 Volts should be avoided.
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater The engine oil installed in the engine at the 4
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
element. factory is a high-quality energy conserving type parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
 The engine block heater must be plugged in lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with leave the transmission in PARK.
at least one hour to have an adequate anticipated climate conditions under which
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
warming effect on the engine. vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades  Manually, by applying the parking brake
Ú page 355. switch.
WARNING!
 Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Remember to disconnect the engine block CAUTION! Brake feature in the customer programmable
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min- features section of the Uconnect settings
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause elec-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result. Ú page 139.
trocution.
NOTE:
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
A long break-in period is not required for the tion. This should be considered a normal part of
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
your vehicle.
The parking brake switch is located in the NOTE: NOTE:

center console. The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
either the released or applied position. The light grade and away from the curb on an uphill
will extinguish upon releasing the switch. grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
the transmission locking mechanism may make
parking brake will automatically engage
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
the parking brake is engaging.
WARNING!
Electric Park Brake Switch The parking brake will release automatically
when the ignition switch is ON, the transmission  Do not rely on the parking brake to operate
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on effectively if the rear brakes have been
the switch momentarily. You may hear a sound is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is
immersed in water or mud.
from the back of the vehicle while the parking buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully  Never use the PARK position as a substi-
To release the parking brake manually, the
engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
instrument cluster and an indicator on the parking brake fully when parked to guard
Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake against vehicle movement and possible
parking brake switch down momentarily. You
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you injury or damage
may hear a sound from the back of the car while
may notice a small amount of brake pedal the parking brake disengages. You may also  When leaving the vehicle, always remove
movement. The parking brake can be applied notice a small amount of movement in the the key fob from the ignition and lock your
even when the ignition switch is OFF. The brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully vehicle.
BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate and can disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the (Continued)
only be released when the ignition switch is in instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the
the ON/RUN position. switch will extinguish.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! WARNING!

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or If the Brake System Warning Light remains on Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
with access to an unlocked vehicle. with the parking brake released, a brake sys- engaged, or repeated use of the parking
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- tem malfunction is indicated. Have the brake brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
tended is dangerous for a number of system serviced by an authorized dealer damage to the brake system; failure to do so
reasons. A child or others could be seriously immediately. can lead to brake failure and a collision.
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, If exceptional circumstances should make it In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
brake pedal or the gear selector. necessary to engage the parking brake while system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward
4
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the
pressure on the EPB switch for as long as lamp flashing. In this event, urgent service of the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning EPB system is required. Do not rely on the
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle Auto Park Brake
operate power windows, other controls, or
remains in motion. The EPB can be programmed to be applied
move the vehicle.
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disen- To disengage the parking brake while the
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the transmission
gaged before driving; failure to do so can vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the
is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled
lead to brake failure and a collision. vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the
and disabled by customer selection through the
parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
 Always fully apply the parking brake when Customer Programmable Features section of
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
brake will remain engaged.
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and release position while the transmission is
cause damage or injury. placed in PARK and the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
SafeHold You should only make repairs for which you While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system have the knowledge and the right equipment. flash continuously while the ignition switch is
that will engage the parking brake automatically You should only enter Brake Service Mode ON/RUN.
if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition during brake service.
NOTE:
switch is in ON/RUN. When servicing your rear brakes, it may be A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will necessary for you or your technician to push the ment cluster display if Brake Service Mode
automatically engage if all of the following rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the cannot be activated.
conditions are met: EPB system, this can only be done after
retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator When brake service work is complete, the
 Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). retraction can be done easily by entering the following steps must be followed to reset the
Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect parking brake system to normal operation:
 There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal. Settings in your vehicle. This menu based  Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
system will guide you through the steps
 The seat belt is unbuckled. necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to  Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
 The driver door is open. perform rear brake service.  Apply the EPB Switch.
Service Mode has requirements that must be NOTE:
 The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
met in order to be activated: A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by  The vehicle must be at a standstill. ment cluster display if Brake Service Mode
pushing the EPB switch while the driver door is cannot be deactivated.
open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once  The parking brake must be disabled.
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled WARNING!
 The transmission must be in PARK or
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
NEUTRAL. You can be badly injured working on or
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
position and back to ON/RUN again.  The EPB switch not activated. work for which you have the knowledge and
Brake Service Mode  The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position. the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
We recommend having your brakes serviced by  The brake pedal not pressed. take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
an authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

You must press and hold the brake pedal while  The vehicle may not engage a newly  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
shifting out of PARK. selected gear when shifting between PARK, with access to an unlocked vehicle.
REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
WARNING! moving while shifting. tended is dangerous for a number of
 Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-  Unintended movement of a vehicle could reasons. A child or others could be seriously
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with or fatally injured. Children should be
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle warned not to touch the parking brake,
to guard against vehicle movement and brake pedal or the transmission gear
while the engine is running. Before exiting a 4
possible injury or damage. vehicle, always come to a complete stop, selector.
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and then apply the parking brake, shift the  Do not leave the key fob in or near the
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to transmission into PARK, and turn the igni- vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
move the gear selector out of PARK with the tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans- mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
mission is in PARK before exiting the securing the vehicle against unwanted windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle. movement. vehicle.
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or  When leaving the vehicle, always make
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, CAUTION!
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could lock the vehicle. Damage to the transmission may occur if the
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. (Continued) following precautions are not observed:
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
someone or something. Only shift into gear after the vehicle has come to a complete
when the engine is idling normally and your stop.
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued)
(Continued)
to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or a normal condition, and precision shifts will
CAUTION! (Continued) REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, moving at low speeds. ters).
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
SIX-S PEED OR N INE-S PEED A UTOMATIC  In the event of a mismatch between the gear
TRANSMISSION selector position and the actual transmission
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE: (R) while driving forward), the position indi-
Your vehicle may be equipped with a six-speed cator will blink continuously until the selector
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK or nine-speed automatic transmission, is returned to the proper position, or the
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park depending on model. This section describes requested shift can be completed.
Interlock which requires the transmission to be operation of both the six-speed and nine-speed
The electronically-controlled transmission
in PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to transmission.
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid The transmission gear range (PRND) is along with environmental and road conditions.
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the transmission in PARK. This system also The nine-speed transmission has been
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, developed to meet the needs of current and
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the push the lock button on the gear selector and
ignition is in the OFF mode. future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
move the selector rearward or forward. You calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT must also press the brake pedal to shift the driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
transmission out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N),
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low NINTH gear only in very specific driving
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds speeds). Select the DRIVE (D) range for normal situations and conditions.
the transmission gear selector in PARK (P) driving.
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be NOTE: when the accelerator pedal is released and the
in the ON/RUN mode (whether the engine is vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
 The transmission electronics are self-cali-
running or not), and the brake pedal must be the brake pedal when shifting between these
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed gears.
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) before shifting the transmission to PARK,
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made otherwise the load on the transmission locking
using the AutoStick shift control Ú page 97. mechanism may make it difficult to move the
Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick gear selector out of PARK. As an added
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
activates AutoStick mode, providing manual curb on a downhill grade and away from the
shift control and displaying the current gear in curb on an uphill grade.
the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling When exiting the vehicle, always:
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) Gear Selector 4
while in the AutoStick position will manually 1. Apply the parking brake.
select the transmission gear. Gear Ranges
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
NOTE:
shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL. 3. Turn the engine off.
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when NOTE: 4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In NOTE:
to allow the selected gear to engage before
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the
accelerating. This is especially important when
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
the engine is cold.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, PARK (P) WARNING!
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. This range supplements the parking brake by  Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
locking the transmission. The engine can be tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
started in this range. Never attempt to use parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the to guard against vehicle movement and
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this possible injury or damage.
range. (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

 Your vehicle could move and injure you and  Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Do not leave the key fob in or near the
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to injure those in or near the vehicle. As with vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
move the gear selector out of PARK with the all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans- while the engine is running. Before exiting a ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle, always come to a complete stop, windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle. then apply the parking brake, shift the vehicle.
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, CAUTION!
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could securing the vehicle against unwanted  Before moving the transmission gear
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. movement. selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit  When leaving the vehicle, always make tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
someone or something. Only shift into gear sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
when the engine is idling normally and your remove the key fob from the vehicle, and gear selector could result.
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. lock the vehicle.  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
 The vehicle may not engage a newly  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
selected gear when shifting between PARK, with access to an unlocked vehicle. as this can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
moving while shifting. tended is dangerous for a number of The following indicators should be used to
reasons. A child or others could be seriously ensure that you have properly engaged the
(Continued)
or fatally injured. Children should be transmission into the PARK position:
warned not to touch the parking brake,  When shifting into PARK, push the lock
brake pedal or the transmission gear button on the gear selector, and firmly move
selector. the selector all the way forward until it stops
(Continued) and is fully seated.
 Look at the transmission gear position schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
display and verify that it indicates the PARK CAUTION! the range of torque converter clutch
position (P). Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any engagement. This is done to prevent
other reason with the transmission in NEU- transmission damage due to overheating.
 With brake pedal released, verify that the
TRAL can cause severe transmission dam- If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
age. "Transmission Temperature Warning Light" may
REVERSE (R) For Recreational Towing Ú page 133. illuminate, and the transmission may operate
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 292. differently until the transmission cools down.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has During cold temperatures, transmission
come to a complete stop. DRIVE (D) operation may be modified depending on 4
NEUTRAL (N) This range should be used for most city and engine and/or transmission temperature as
highway driving. It provides the smoothest well as vehicle speed. This feature improves
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for warm up time of the engine and transmission to
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
prolonged periods with the engine running. The achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
economy. The transmission automatically
engine may be started in this range. Apply the the torque converter clutch (and, for the
upshifts through all forward gears.
parking brake and shift the transmission into nine-speed, shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear),
PARK if you must exit the vehicle. When frequent transmission shifting occurs
are inhibited until the engine and/or
(such as when operating the vehicle under
transmission is warm. Normal operation will
WARNING! heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
resume once the temperature(s) have risen to a
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off suitable level.
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
to select a lower gear Ú page 97. Under these AutoStick
unsafe practices that limit your response to
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
changing traffic or road conditions. You might AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
performance and extend transmission life by
lose control of the vehicle and have a colli- feature providing manual shift control, giving
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
sion. you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
If the transmission temperature exceeds allows you to maximize engine braking,
normal operating limits, the transmission eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
controller may modify the transmission shift
and improve overall vehicle performance. This  The transmission will automatically down- NOTE:
system can also provide you with more control shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
during passing, city driving, cold slippery lugging) and will display the current gear. enabled, AutoStick is not active.
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
 The transmission will automatically down- To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector
many other situations.
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop. to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of
Operation After a stop, the driver should manually the AutoStick position at any time without
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), it can accelerated.
be moved forward and rearward. This allows the  You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
WARNING!
driver to manually select the transmission gear SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in six-speed Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-) models, or in 4WD Low, SNOW mode, or ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an SAND mode, where available). Tapping (+) (at could lose their grip and the vehicle could
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
instrument cluster. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up snowy or icy conditions. Transmission Limp Home Mode
or down when the driver moves the gear  If a requested downshift would cause the Transmission function is monitored
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
engine lugging or overspeed condition would condition is detected that could result in
result. It will remain in the selected gear until  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed. transmission damage, Transmission Limp
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
as described below.  Transmission shifting will be more noticeable transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
 Six-speed transmissions will automatically when AutoStick is enabled. or may remain in NEUTRAL (N). The Malfunction
upshift when necessary to prevent engine Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
 The system may revert to automatic shift
over-speed. Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
to an authorized dealer for service without
detected.
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the Torque Converter Clutch with no driver inputs or additional driving skills
transmission can be reset to regain all forward A feature designed to improve fuel economy required. Under normal driving conditions, the
gears by performing the following steps: has been included in the automatic front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is
1. Stop the vehicle.
torque converter engages automatically at shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater
possible. If not, shift the transmission to different feeling or response during normal the power transfer to the rear wheels.
NEUTRAL. operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
speed drops or during some accelerations, the throttle input (where one may have no wheel
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine
turns off.
clutch automatically disengages. spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a 4
preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and
NOTE:
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. performance characteristics.
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
5. Restart the engine. the engine and/or transmission is warm
CAUTION!
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the All wheels must have the same size and type
Because the engine speed is higher when the
problem is no longer detected, the tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
transmission will return to normal Unequal tire size may cause failure of the
seem as if the transmission is not shifting prop-
operation. power transfer unit.
erly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The
NOTE: torque converter clutch will function normally
once the powertrain is sufficiently warm. Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer The four-wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF normal driving mode.
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to EQUIPPED NOTE:
assess the condition of your transmission. If the It is not possible to carry out the change of
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer J EEP ACTIVE DRIVE mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
service is required. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power 75 mph (120 km/h).
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)  When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed. NOTE:
The buttons for the activation of four-wheel  When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated  Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and
drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain from AUTO to any other off-road modes. then become active on the Selec-Terrain
and allow you to select the following: switch until the shift is complete.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk
 4WD LOCK models only)  The instrument cluster display will illuminate
 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only) the "4WD LOW" icon.
Active Drive Control — If Equipped Disabling 4WD LOW

To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary. Push the 4WD LOW button
once.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
4WD LOW Button (Trailhawk) to provide the best performance for all terrains.
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
MODE SELECTION G UIDE
off-road performance in all modes. To enable
4WD LOCK Switch 4WD LOW, please follow the steps below: Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to desired mode.
Enabling 4WD LOW
ensure immediate availability of torque to the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving ON/RUN position or with the engine running,
mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the push the 4WD LOW button once . The
following ways: instrument cluster will display the message
"4WD LOW" once the shift is complete.
also reduces fuel consumption, since it NOTE:

allows the disconnect of the drive shaft
where conditions permit.  ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
 SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather. For  Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep
use on and off-road on surfaces with poor downhill control Ú page 213.
traction, such as roads covered with snow.
When in SNOW mode (depending on certain
POWER STEERING
operating conditions), the transmission may The electric power steering system will provide
Selec-Terrain Knob use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) increased vehicle response and ease of 4
during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
 SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as dry sand. The
WARNING!
transmission is set to provide maximum trac-
tion. Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
 MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
with poor traction, such as roads covered by possible.
mud or wet grass.
 ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" OR "POWER
Selec-Terrain Knob (Trailhawk)
available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM”
 AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
the vehicle to maximize traction and allow message and a steering wheel icon are
continuous operation, is fully automatic and the highest steering capacity for off-road displayed on the instrument cluster display, it
can be used on and off-road. This mode surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
balances traction to ensure maneuverability performance off-road. Use for low speed the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
and acceleration improvement compared to obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode lost power steering assistance Ú page 68.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT -

PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce  The gear selector must be in a forward gear
an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
fuel consumption. The system will stop the and the brake pedal pressed.
display, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
an over temperature condition in the power required conditions are met. Releasing the move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
steering system. You will lose power steering brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
assistance momentarily until the over will automatically re-start the engine. Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
temperature condition no longer exists. Once This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy upon return to an engine running condition.
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES
turns off Ú page 68. engine starts. N OT AUTOSTOP
NOTE: AUTOSTOP MODE Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
 Even if the power steering assistance is no The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
longer operational, it is still possible to steer normal customer engine start. At that time, the operation of the Stop/Start system may be
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will system will go into STOP/START READY. viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
be a substantial increase in steering effort, To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Start Screen. In the following situations the
especially at low speeds and during parking engine will not stop:
Must Occur:
maneuvers.
 The system must be in STOP/START READY  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
 If the condition persists, see an authorized state. A STOP/START READY message will be
dealer for service.  Driver’s door is not closed.
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 68.  Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
 Battery charge is low.  Steering angle beyond threshold.  Battery voltage drops too low.
 The vehicle is on a steep grade.  Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is  Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed.
set.
 Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an  A Stop/Start system error occurs.
acceptable cabin temperature has not been It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
 Vehicle is in 4WD Low transfer case mode.
achieved. several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under Conditions That Force An Application Of The
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
more extreme conditions of the items listed Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
blower speed.
above.
 The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
 HVAC set to MAX A/C.
TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN released. 4
 Engine has not reached normal operating AUTOSTOP MODE  The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
temperature.
While in a forward gear, the engine will start belt is unbuckled.
 The transmission is not in a forward gear. when the brake pedal is released or the throttle  The engine hood has been opened.
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
 Hood is open.
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.  A Stop/Start system error occurs.
 Vehicle is in 4WD Low transfer case mode. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with
 Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient Automatically While In Autostop Mode: the engine off, the engine may require a manual
pressure.  The transmission selector is moved out of restart and the EPB may require a manual
DRIVE (D). release (press brake pedal and press EPB
 Accelerator pedal input. switch) Ú page 68.
 Engine temp too high.  To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from  HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
previous AUTOSTOP.  HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION CRUISE C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

S TART S YSTEM If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
system, the system will not shut down the accelerator operations at speeds greater than
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” 20 mph (32 km/h).
message will appear in the instrument cluster The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
display Ú page 68. right side of the steering wheel.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Stop/Start OFF Switch

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch bank). The light on the switch will
(ACC) system:
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and  Cruise Control for cruising at a constant Cruise Control Buttons
the autostop mode will be disabled Ú page 68. preset speed. 1 — On/Off
NOTE:  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining 2 — CANC/Cancel
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to a set distance between you and the vehicle 3 — SET (+)/Accel
an ON condition every time the ignition is turned ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to 4 — RES/Resume
off and back on. automatically adjust the preset speed. 5 — SET (-)/Decel
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/ NOTE: NOTE:

S TART S YSTEM In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control Control system has been designed to shut down
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. Always be aware of the mode selected.
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise U.S. Speed (mph)
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
WARNING!
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting Leaving the Cruise Control system on when will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
the desired vehicle set speed. not in use is dangerous. You could acciden- subsequent tap of the button results in an
tally set the system or cause it to go faster adjustment of 1 mph.
WARNING! than you want. You could lose control and
have an accident. Always turn the system OFF  If the button is continually pushed, the set
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the speed will continue to adjust until the button
when you are not using it.
system cannot maintain a constant speed. is released, then the new set speed will be
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi- established.
tions, and you could lose control and have an To Set A Desired Speed 4
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle Metric Speed (km/h)
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, has reached the desired speed, push and  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
snow-covered or slippery. release the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at Each subsequent tap of the button results in
To Activate the selected speed. Once a speed has been set, an adjustment of 1 km/h.
a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise  If the button is continually pushed, the set
(km/h)” will appear indicating the set speed. A
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear speed will continue to adjust until the button
cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the is released, then the new set speed will be
also appear and stay on in the instrument
Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off, established.
cluster when the speed is set.
push the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is Press the accelerator as you would normally.
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
off. The system should be turned off when not When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
in use. When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase return to the set speed.
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
Using Cruise Control On Hills the Cruise Control system without erasing the ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
The transmission may downshift on hills to set speed from memory. engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
maintain the vehicle set speed. The following conditions will also deactivate the without the constant need to reset your speed.
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
and down hills. A slight speed change on from memory:
ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a  Vehicle parking brake is applied
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may NOTE:
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.  Stability event occurs
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
 Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
WARNING!
 Engine overspeed occurs (not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the matically to maintain a preset following
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition distance, while matching the speed of the
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi- in the OFF position, will erase the set speed vehicle ahead.
tions, and you could lose control and have an from memory.
 Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifi-
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F cations to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery. EQUIPPED mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
To Resume Speed driving convenience provided by Cruise Control  Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
while traveling on highways and major distance not set) will not detect vehicles
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
roadways. However, it is not a safety system directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
button and release. Resume can be used at any
and not designed to prevent collisions. The mode selected Ú page 360.
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Cruise Control function performs differently if
To Deactivate your vehicle is not equipped with ACC
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC Ú page 104.
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

The buttons on the right side of the steering
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-  Does not always fully recognize wheel operate the ACC system.
nience system. It is not a substitute for complex driving conditions, which can
active driver involvement. It is always the result in wrong or missing distance
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of warnings.
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
You should turn the ACC system off:
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
under all road conditions. Your complete driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
4
attention is always required while driving to tion zones).
maintain safe control of your vehicle.  When entering a turn lane or highway off
Failure to follow these warnings can result ramp; when driving on roads that are Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
in a collision and death or serious personal winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
injury. 1 — CANC/Cancel
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
 The ACC system: When towing a trailer up or down steep
 3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
 Does not react to pedestrians, slopes. 4 — Distance Decrease Button
oncoming vehicles, and stationary  When circumstances do not allow safe 5 — SET (+)/Accel
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a driving at a constant speed. 6 — RES/Resume
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). 7 — SET (-)/Decel
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather 8 — Distance Increase Button
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu  System Off  When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
The instrument cluster display will show the REVERSE or NEUTRAL
 ACC Proximity Warning
current ACC system settings. The information it  When the vehicle speed is below the
displays depends on ACC system status.  ACC Unavailable Warning
minimum speed range
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off The instrument cluster display will return to the  When the brakes are overheated
button until one of the following appears in the last display selected after five seconds of no
instrument cluster display: ACC display activity.  When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
Adaptive Cruise Control Off Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)  When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read The minimum set speed for the ACC system is low speeds
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” 20 mph (32 km/h).  When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When the system is turned on and in the ready your vehicle in close proximity
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed state, the instrument cluster display will read  ESC Full Off Mode is active
setting has not been selected, the display will “ACC Ready.”
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” To Activate/Deactivate
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
Off.” (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is instrument cluster display will read “ACC
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.” NOTE: Ready.”
You cannot engage ACC under the following
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the To turn the system off, push and release the
conditions:
instrument cluster display. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
The ACC screen may display once again if any of  When in 4WD Low again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the following ACC activity occurs: the instrument cluster display will read
 When the brakes are applied
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
 System Cancel  When the parking brake is applied
 Driver Override
NOTE:
WARNING! WARNING!
 Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sys- In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
tem on when not in use is dangerous. You mode, the system will not react to vehicles
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
could accidentally set the system or cause it ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
to go faster than you want. You could lose does not activate and no alarm will sound
the instrument cluster display.
control and have a collision. Always leave the even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
system off when you are not using it. since neither the presence of the vehicle  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
To Set A Desired Speed detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance system will not be controlling the distance 4
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
Always be aware which mode is selected. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button the position of the accelerator pedal.
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed. If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
NOTE: The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
20 mph (20 km/h).
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without Speed Cruise Control systems:
an ACC distance set. To change between the NOTE:  The brake pedal is applied
different modes, push the ACC on/off button Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise If either system is set when the vehicle speed is  The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
Control on/off button will result in turning on above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
be the current speed of the vehicle. position
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction To Resume

Control System (ESC/TCS) activates WARNING!
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the The Resume function should only be used if
 The vehicle parking brake is applied
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
 The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates display will show the last set speed. a set speed that is too high or too low for pre-
vailing traffic and road conditions could
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode Resume can be used at any speed above cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed too sharply for safe operation. Failure to fol-
 The braking temperature exceeds normal
Cruise Control is being used. low these warnings can result in a collision
range (overheated)
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph and death or serious personal injury.
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC (0 km/h) when ACC is active.
system:
NOTE: To Vary The Speed Setting
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
 While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
 Driver door is opened at low speeds After setting a speed, you can increase the set
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
To Turn Off the system will cancel. The driver will have to speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if: standstill. U.S. Speed (mph)
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
button is pushed stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
close proximity. subsequent tap of the button results in an
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button adjustment of 1 mph.
is pushed
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
 4WD Low is engaged ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h) either have to push the RES (resume) button,
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. the ACC to the existing set speed.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in  The ACC system maintains set speed when
an adjustment of 1 km/h. driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h addition, downshifting may occur while
increments until the button is released. The climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
new set speed is reflected in the instrument is normal operation and necessary to main-
cluster display. tain set speed. When driving uphill and down- Distance Settings 4
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
NOTE: temperature exceeds normal range (over- 2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
When you override and push the SET (+) button heated). 3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the 4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
current speed of the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be To increase the distance setting, push the
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set: set by varying the distance setting between four Distance Increase button and release. Each
 When you use the SET (-) button to decel- bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars time the button is pushed, the distance setting
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not (medium) and one bar (short). Using this increases by one bar (longer).
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
speed, the brake system will automatically calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle To decrease the distance setting, push the
slow the vehicle. ahead. This distance setting will show in the Distance Decrease button and release. Each
instrument cluster display. time the button is pushed, the distance setting
 The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a decreases by one bar (shorter).
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
same lane, the instrument cluster display will
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
show the ACC Set With Target Detected Light.
The system will then adjust vehicle speed NOTE: NOTE:

automatically to maintain the distance setting, The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
regardless of the set speed. display is a warning for the driver to take action standstill for approximately three consecutive
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance and does not necessarily mean that the minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
until: Forward Collision Warning system is applying and the ACC system will be cancelled.
the brakes autonomously.
 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
above the set speed. Overtake Aid if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) door is opened, the parking brake will be
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
view of the sensor.
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
 The distance setting is changed. set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This WARNING!
additional acceleration is triggered when the When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
 The system disengages Ú page 108.
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; active when passing on the left hand side. vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
however, the driver can always apply the brakes Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
manually, if necessary.
ACC Operation At Stop
collision and death or serious personal injury.
In the event that the ACC system brings your
NOTE: vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the Display Warnings And Maintenance
in front, your vehicle will resume motion,
ACC system applies the brakes. without any driver interaction, if the vehicle in “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC front starts moving within two seconds of your Warning
predicts that its maximum braking level is not vehicle coming to a standstill.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this If the vehicle in front does not start moving within Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, sound when conditions temporarily limit system
instrument cluster display and a chime will the driver will either have to push the RES performance.
sound while ACC continues to apply its (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
maximum braking force. reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe  Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
may also become temporarily blinded due to not to damage the sensor lens. not recommended. Doing so may block the
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
Doing so could cause an ACC system “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
the above message and the system will
malfunction or failure and require a sensor The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
deactivate.
realignment.
Front Windshield” warning will display and a
This message can sometimes be displayed
 If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is chime will sound when conditions temporarily
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
damaged due to a collision, see an autho- limit system performance. This most often
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The 4
rized dealer for service. occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the  Do not attach or install any accessories near may also become temporarily blinded due to
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in the sensor, including transparent material or obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
its path this warning may temporarily occur. aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
ACC system failure or malfunction.
NOTE: these cases, the instrument cluster display will
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar When the condition that deactivated the system read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise is no longer present, the system will return to Front Windshield” and the system will have
Control is still available. the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will degraded performance.
resume function by simply reactivating it. This message can sometimes be displayed
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require NOTE: while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
 If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
behind the lower grille.
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without objects in its path this warning may temporarily
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, occur.
important to note the following maintenance have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
items: rized dealer.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
should examine the windshield and the camera activating ACC again later, following an ignition
located on the back side of the inside rearview cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of dealer.
an obstruction.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
When the condition that created limited
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
functionality is no longer present, the system
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
will return to full functionality.
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
NOTE: stay alert and may need to intervene. The
Offset Driving Condition Example
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean following are examples of these types of
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently situations: Turns And Bends
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
Towing A Trailer
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the system may increase or decrease the vehicle
windshield and forward facing camera Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead
inspected at an authorized dealer. detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the
Offset Driving
Service ACC/FCW Warning system will resume your original set speed. This
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
If the system turns off, and the instrument that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Service Required”, there may be an internal The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
system fault or a temporary malfunction that line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example Lane Changing Example 4

Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles
Turn Or Bend Example ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is Some narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles,
completely in the lane in which you are traveling near the outer edges of the lane or
Using ACC On Hills
traveling. In the lane changing example below, merging into the lane are not detected until they
ACC performance may be limited when driving ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing have moved to the center of the lane. There may
on hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
lane depending on the speed, vehicle load, too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hill. may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles ParkSense will retain the last system state PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
ACC does not react to stationary objects and (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
react in situations where the vehicle you are position.
from the Customer - Programmable Features
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead ParkSense can be active only when the gear section of the Uconnect system Ú page 139.
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and selector is in REVERSE. The system will remain
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. active until the vehicle speed is increased to The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. While the instrument cluster display Ú page 68. It
in REVERSE and above the system's operating provides visual warnings to indicate the
speed, a warning will appear in the instrument distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too the detected obstacle.
fast. The system will become active again if the PARKSENSE DISPLAY
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist system
PARKSENSE SENSORS status.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the showing a single arc in one or more regions
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. based on the obstacle’s distance and location
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — The sensors can detect obstacles from relative to the vehicle.
IF EQUIPPED approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ region, the display will show a single solid arc in
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
visual and audible indications of the distance the center rear region. As the vehicle moves
on the location, type and orientation of the closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle obstacle.
when backing up (e.g. during a parking single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
maneuver). For limitations of this system and audible chime increases as the objects get
recommendations see, Ú page 119. close to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and /or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the audible chime increases as the objects get close
to the vehicle.
Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches
79 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
(200 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Single, 1/2 sec-
Audible Alert
None ond, audible Audible chime increases as the objects get close to the vehicle. Continuous
Chime
chime is heard.
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: When the ParkSense switch is pushed to switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, disable the system, the instrument cluster LED will be on.
if on, when the system is sounding an audio display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
tone. message for approximately five seconds.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
ENABLING A ND DISABLING P ARKSENSE The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and ParkSense switch LED will be off when the Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
disabled with the ParkSense switch, system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is condition, the instrument cluster display will
located on the switch panel below the pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
Uconnect display. and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE could provide a false indication that an
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
PRECAUTIONS
REQUIRED” message. Under this condition,
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
ParkSense will not operate. 
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park- Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR carriers, etc. are attached to the rear fascia/
Sense system operating properly.
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
display make sure the outer surface and the  Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra- system misinterpreting a close object as a
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean tions could affect the performance of Park- sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other Sense. UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the to be displayed in the instrument cluster 4
 When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
message continues to appear, see your display.
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
authorized dealer.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it NOTE:
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE remains off until you turn it on again, even if If any objects are attached to the bumper within
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster you cycle the ignition. a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
display, see an authorized dealer. cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM of the radio when it is sounding a tone.  The operation of the rear sensors is automat-
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, ically deactivated when the trailer's electric
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use taking care not to scratch or damage them. plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean The sensors must not be covered with ice, socket. The rear sensors are automatically
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is
so can result in the system not working prop- removed.
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
the sensors.
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to

WARNING! CAUTION! the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning
 Drivers must be careful when backing up  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
even when using ParkSense. Always check unable to recognize every obstacle, driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind including small obstacles. Parking curbs
The driver may manually override the haptic
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, might be temporarily detected or not
warning by applying torque into the steering
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and detected at all. Obstacles located above or
wheel at any time.
blind spots before backing up. You are below the sensors will not be detected
responsible for safety and must continue to when they are in close proximity. When only a single lane marking is detected
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when
to do so can result in serious injury or turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
death. provides a visual warning through the
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the driver looks over
recommended that the ball mount and his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. to remain within the lane. When only a single
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque)
warning will not be provided.
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury NOTE:
or damage to vehicles or obstacles LANESENSE OPERATION When operating conditions have been met, the
because the hitch ball will be much closer LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. audible and visual warning to the driver if
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
Also, the sensors could detect the ball removed. The system will cancel if the driver
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending does not return their hands to the wheel.
and measure vehicle position within the lane
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
boundaries.
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR O FF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Line/ 4
LaneSense button once (LED turns on). Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:  When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- NOTE:

The LaneSense system will retain the last Sense telltale is solid white when only the The LaneSense system operates with similar
system state on or off from the last ignition left lane marking has been detected and the behavior for a right lane departure when only
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/ system is ready to provide visual warnings in the right lane marking has been detected.
RUN position. the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs. Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE  When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
lane drift condition through the instrument both of the lane markings have been
ture situation, the left lane line flashes from
cluster display. detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
white to gray and the LaneSense telltale
green when both lane markings have been
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
detected and the system is “armed” to
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane provide visual warnings in the instrument
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries cluster display and a torque warning in the
have not been detected and the LaneSense steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
telltale is solid white. ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale Lane Sensed With Solid White Line/Solid Yellow Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Line/
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane Telltale Flashing Yellow Telltale
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
NOTE:
white. The LaneSense telltale changes has been approached and is in a lane depar- The LaneSense system operates with similar
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time ture situation, the left lane line flashes from
behavior for a right lane departure.
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the white to gray, and the LaneSense telltale
opposite direction of the lane boundary. changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
At this time torque is applied to the steering Equipped
For example: if approaching the left side of
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
boundary. lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
right.
For example: if approaching the left side of have not been detected and the LaneSense
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the telltale is solid white.
right.
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale 4
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected Yellow Telltale  When the LaneSense system senses a lane
 When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- NOTE: drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
Sense telltale is solid white when only the The LaneSense system operates with similar yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
left lane marking has been detected and the behavior for a right lane departure when only from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the right lane marking has been detected. torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
the instrument cluster display if an uninten- opposite direction of the lane boundary.
tional lane departure occurs. Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
For example: if approaching the left side of
 When the LaneSense system is on, the lane the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that right.
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
both of the lane markings have been
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
and the LaneSense telltale changes from
green when both lane markings have been
solid white to flashing yellow.
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
 The warnings are disabled with the use of the

turn signal.
 The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA

Lane Sensed With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow/Solid Yellow
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
Telltale Telltale
to see an on-screen image of the rear
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
NOTE:
has been approached and is in a lane depar- selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
The LaneSense system operates with similar
ture situation, the left lane line flashes displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
behavior for a right lane departure.
yellow. The LaneSense telltale stays solid display screen along with a caution note to
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the screen. After five seconds this note will
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the lane boundary. disappear. The ParkView camera is located on
the intensity of the torque warning (Low/
For example: if approaching the left side of Medium/High) and the warning zone sensitivity the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure plate.
right. through the Uconnect system Ú page 139. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
NOTE:
mode is exited and the previous screen
 When enabled the system operates above appears.
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
CAUTION!
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
bottom of the Uconnect display.
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following camera is unable to view every obstacle or
the Rear View Camera system on. table shows the approximate distances for each object in your drive path.
zone:  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
NOTE: be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has Distance To The Rear
Zone able to stop in time when an obstacle is
programmable modes of operation that may be Of The Vehicle
seen. It is recommended that the driver 4
selected through the Uconnect system Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) look frequently over his/her shoulder when
Ú page 139. 1 ft - 6.5 ft using ParkView.
Yellow
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (30 cm - 2 m)
NOTE:
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera 6.5 ft or greater
Green If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
mode is exited and the previous screen (2 m or greater)
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the WARNING! not cover the lens.
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds unless the following Drivers must be careful when backing up Zoom View
conditions occur: The vehicle speed exceeds even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
When the Rear View Camera image is being
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into Camera. Always check carefully behind your
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
(13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is
position, or the user presses “X” to exit out of animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
the camera video display. spots before backing up. You are responsible
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
for the safety of your surroundings and must
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on image will zoom in to four times the standard
continue to pay attention while backing up. view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the view to the standard Back Up Camera
and its projected backup path based on the
death. display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is 1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the 3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera outer edge of the fuel door. nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
delay view will display the standard Back Up full.
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
selection will automatically resume.
the nozzle.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as 5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h). door.
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available

until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or WARNING!
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph Fuel Filler Door  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
(13 km/h). near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
NOTE:
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or This is in violation of most state and federal
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal fire regulations and may cause the
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail- “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
able and the icon will appear grey.
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be portable container that is inside of a
visible. vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE Fuel Filler Pipe
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors 2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
inside the pipe seal the system. the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
VEHICLE LOADING Payload Inflation Pressure

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
CERTIFICATION LABEL allowable load weight a truck can carry, vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety including the weight of the driver, all GAWR.
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a passengers, options and cargo.
Curb Weight
certification label affixed to the driver's side Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
door or pillar. The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
This label contains the month and year of the front and rear axles. The load must be including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR conditions, and with no occupants or cargo 4
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating of each axle is not exceeded. loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number weight values are determined by weighing your
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load vehicle on a commercial scale before any
included on this label and indicates the Month, occupants or cargo are added.
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
that appears on the bottom of the label is your Heavier axles or suspension components Loading
VIN. sometimes specified by purchasers for
The actual total weight and the weight of the
increased durability does not necessarily
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) increase the vehicle's GVWR.
best be determined by weighing it when it is
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your Tire Size loaded and ready for operation.
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be Replacement tires must be equal to the load not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are capacity of this tire size. rear of the vehicle should then be determined
not exceeded. separately to be sure that the load is properly
Rim Size distributed over the front and rear axle.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
size listed. of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted coverage, follow the requirements and The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate recommendations in this manual concerning and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
until the specified weight limitations are met. vehicles used for trailer towing. and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
Store the heavier items down low and be sure not exceed either front or rear GAWR
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
Ú page 127.
loose items securely before driving. The following trailer towing related definitions
Improper weight distributions can have an will assist you in understanding the following WARNING!
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers information:
It is important that you do not exceed the
and handles and the way the brakes operate. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your driving condition can result if either rating is
CAUTION! exceeded. You could lose control of the vehi-
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the and tongue weight. The total load must be cle and have a collision.
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or Ú page 127. Tongue Weight (TW)
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The TW is the downward force exerted on the
This could cause you to lose control. Also
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
overloading can shorten the life of your vehi- The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
as part of the load on your vehicle.
cle. weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in Trailer Frontal Area
TRAILER TOWING or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for The frontal area is the maximum height
operation" condition. multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you The recommended way to measure GTW is to a trailer.
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as supported by the scale. The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
possible. that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides Weight-Distributing Hitch and may be required depending on vehicle and
adjustable friction associated with the A weight-distributing system works by applying trailer configuration/loading to comply with
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted leverage through spring (load) bars. They are Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
trailer swaying motions while traveling. typically used for heavier loads to distribute
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front WARNING!
swaying trailer and automatically applies axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine accordance with the manufacturer's directions, Hitch system may reduce handling,
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. it provides for a more level ride, offering more stability, braking performance, and could
consistent steering and brake control thereby result in a collision.
Weight-Carrying Hitch enhancing towing safety. The addition of a 4
 Weight Distributing Systems may not be
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are stability. Trailer sway control and a weight dealer for additional information.
commonly used to tow small and medium sized distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
trailers. recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

Maximum GTW Maximum Tongue Wt.
Engine/Transmission Model
(Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note)
2.4L / 6 Speed Auto FWD Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / 9 Speed Auto FWD or 4WD 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
When towing a trailer, the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs (100 kg), whichever is lower pro-
vided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
Maximum GTW Maximum Tongue Wt.

Engine/Transmission Model
(Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note)
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT  The trailer tongue weight of the trailer. TOWING REQUIREMENTS
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight  The weight of any other type of cargo or To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
stamped on your trailer hitch. equipment put in or on your vehicle. drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: CAUTION!
Remember that everything put into or on the  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
additional factory-installed options, or autho- driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
rized dealer-installed options, must be consid- be damaged.
ered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the tire loading information placard  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
located on the driver’s door pillar for the that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
Weight Distribution maximum combined weight of occupants and 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
cargo for your vehicle. at full throttle. This helps the engine and
Consider the following items when computing
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
the weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle: heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
Servicing and the proper maintenance intervals WARNING! (Continued) to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
Ú page 296. When towing a trailer, never  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked vehicle.
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. on a grade. When parking, apply the  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the pressures before trailer usage.
WARNING! tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
 Make certain that the load is secured in the damage before towing a trailer.
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.  Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be  GCWR must not be exceeded. capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR 4
difficult for the driver to control. You could and GAWR limits.
 Total weight must be distributed between
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli- the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the  For further information Ú page 330.
sion. following four ratings are not exceeded: Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do GVWR
  Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
 GTW system or vacuum system of your vehicle
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
performance or damage to brakes, axle,  GAWR equate braking and possible personal injury.
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.  Tongue weight rating for the trailer
 An electronically actuated trailer brake
hitch utilized.
 Safety chains must always be used controller is required when towing a trailer
between your vehicle and trailer. Always with electronically actuated brakes. When
Towing Requirements — Tires towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a surge actuated brake system, an electronic
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack compact spare tire. brake controller is not required.
for turning corners.  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
(Continued) when towing while using a full size spare tire. over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And NOTE:

WARNING!
Wiring  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
 Do not connect trailer brakes to your Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over- trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
trailer are required for motoring safety. connect) into water.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory area.
 Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
approved trailer harness and connector.
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your NOTE:
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
Failure to do so could result in an accident. wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
CAUTION! the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
illustrations.
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
Four-Pin Connector
this could lead to accelerated brake lining
wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer 1 — Ground
stopping distances. 2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
5 — Ground increased engine braking on steep downhill

6 — Left Stop/Turn grades, select the LOW range.
7 — Running Lamps Cruise Control — If Equipped
TOWING TIPS  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away  When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
from heavy traffic. ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
Seven-Pin Connector Automatic Transmission to cruising speed. 4
1 — Battery Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
2 — Backup Lamps transmission controls include a drive strategy to
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
3 — Right Stop/Turn avoid frequent shifting when towing. For
4 — Electric Brakes
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
NOTE: 3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place

the transmission in PARK (P). Turn the CAUTION! (Continued)
 When towing your vehicle, always follow
engine off.  Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper
state and provincial Highway Safety offices 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
face will be damaged.
for additional details. dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions. RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4
 You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, 5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, MODELS
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake but do not start the engine.
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer 6. Press and hold the brake pedal. ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT
programmable features in the Uconnect ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on flatbed
7. Release the EPB. or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are
Settings.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, OFF the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — and release the brake pedal.
F RONT-W HEEL DRIVE (FWD) M ODELS CAUTION!
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front CAUTION! Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be the ground can cause severe transmission
 Towing with the front wheels on the ground and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off will cause severe transmission damage.
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off from improper towing is not covered under
Damage from improper towing is not the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this covered under the New Vehicle Limited
procedure: Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,  Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
following the dolly manufacturer's released, and remains released, while ON-R OAD D RIVING T IPS
instructions. being towed.
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
(Continued) and a narrower track to make them capable of
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics Driving Through Water Flowing Water

give them a higher center of gravity than Although your vehicle is capable of driving If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
conventional passenger cars. through water, there are a number of storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is precautions that must be considered before level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
a better view of the road, allowing you to entering the water: you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in
anticipate problems. They are not designed for excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
cornering at the same speeds as conventional CAUTION! can erode the streambed causing your vehicle
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports When driving through water, do not exceed to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt before entering as a precaution, and check all to allow for drifting. 4
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, fluids afterward. Driving through water may Standing Water
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may cause damage that may not be covered by
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
16 inches (40.5 cm), and reduce speed
OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
ensure safety and prevent damage to your water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction and control on slippery or vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to (Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep determine the depth and the bottom condition deeper than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. speed appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Ú page 99. This range should be limited to Proceed with caution and maintain a steady Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
sand where additional low speed pulling power deep water to minimize wave effects.
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
Maintenance Hill Climbing

WARNING!
After driving through deep water, inspect your NOTE:
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine, If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
transmission, Power Transfer Unit, and Rear conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Drive Module) to ensure they have not been grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and Before climbing a steep hill, shift the may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should transmission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE
be flushed/changed as soon as possible to System to 4WD LOW. Use FIRST gear and 4WD gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEU-
prevent component damage. LOW for very steep hills. TRAL using only the brake.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand NOTE:

NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage,
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill
but before coming to a stop to avoid digging into
additional control at slower speeds, shift the - drive straight up or down.
the loose surface and rendering the operator of
transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
the vehicle stuck/immobile. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 99. Do not shift If you stall or begin to lose headway while
maintain headway by turning the front wheels
to a lower gear than necessary to maintain climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
“bite” into the surface and may provide traction
wheels and traction will be lost. Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back slowly
to complete the climb.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads down the hill allowing the compression braking
because engine braking may cause skidding of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
and loss of control. brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
Traction Downhill  Completely inspect the underbody of your

vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, WARNING!
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the
4WD System to 4WD LOW range or select Hill suspension, and exhaust system for damage. Abrasive material in any part of the braking
Descent Control (if equipped) Ú page 218. Let system may cause excessive wear or unpre-
 Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four dictable braking performance. Full braking
clean as required.
wheels turning against engine compression power may not be available to prevent a colli-
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, sion. If you have been operating your vehicle
speed and direction. particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo- in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten braking components as soon as possible.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated them, if required, and torque to the values
braking can cause brake fade with loss of 4
specified in the Service Manual.  Impacted material can cause wheel imbal-
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
 Check for accumulations of plants or brush. ance. Freeing the wheels of impacted mate-
by downshifting the transmission whenever
These things could be a fire hazard. They rial will likely rectify imbalance condition.
possible.
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
After Driving Off-Road axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
 After extended operation in mud, sand,
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
for damage. linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
138
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
WARNING!
For detailed information about your Uconnect unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle  It is not possible to know or to predict all of
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, systems and wireless communications. Vehicle the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual software technology continues to evolve over systems are breached. It may be possible
Supplement. time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, that vehicle systems, including safety
NOTE: evaluates and takes appropriate steps as related systems, could be impaired or a
Uconnect screen images are for illustration needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, loss of vehicle control could occur that may
your vehicle may require software updates to result in an accident involving serious injury
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
improve the usability and performance of your or death.
ware for your vehicle.
systems or to reduce the potential risk of  ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
CYBERSECURITY unauthorized and unlawful access to your your vehicle if it came from a trusted
vehicle systems. source. Media of unknown origin could
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to possibly contain malicious software, and if
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
most recent version of vehicle software (such as possibility for vehicle systems to be
send and receive information. This information
Uconnect software) is installed. breached.
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.  As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA 139
NOTE: access and change Programmable Features. CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES

Many features can vary by vehicle and
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
packages.
directly regarding software updates.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
 To help further improve vehicle security and and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
minimize the potential risk of a security center of the instrument panel. In addition,
breach, vehicle owners should: there is a Scroll/Enter control knob below and
 Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com to the right of the screen. Turn the control knob
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca to scroll through menus and change settings.
(Canadian Residents) to learn about Push the center of the control knob one or more
available Uconnect software updates. times to select or change a setting.
 Only connect and use trusted media Your Uconnect system may also have Screen 5
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons
USBs, CDs). Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to On Faceplate And Soft Buttons On Touchscreen
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
Privacy of any wireless and wired
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the
and private communications without your Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
consent Ú page 84.
Press the Apps button, then press the
UCONNECT SETTINGS Settings button on the touchscreen to display
The Uconnect system uses a combination of the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the Uconnect system allows you to access
faceplate located in the center of the programmable features.
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
140 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: When making a selection, only press one button press the X button on the touchscreen to close
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
desired menu, press and release the preferred Down Arrow button on the right side of the
settings may vary.
setting “option” until a check mark appears screen will allow you to toggle up or down
 All settings should be changed with the igni- next to the setting, showing that setting has through the available settings.
tion in the ON/RUN position. been selected. Once the setting is complete,
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display the chosen language. The available setting is:
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The avail-
Language
able languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the sys-
tem set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically
Display Mode
adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to
adjust the brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
Display Brightness With Headlights ON on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
MULTIMEDIA 141

This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
Keyboard keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
Control Screen Timeout
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed. 5
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Dis-
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
play.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
142 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:

US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pres-
Custom
sure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure-
ment independently.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
Voice Response Length
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The
“Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” set-
Show Command List
ting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what
the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
MULTIMEDIA 143
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The sys-
Sync Time With GPS
tem will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
Time Format
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
Set Time Hours off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
5
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
Set Time Minutes be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
144 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.

This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the fixed backup camera guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the surround view camera when
Surround View Camera Delay
shifting out of reverse.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the surround view camera guidelines on or off.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access
a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warn-
ing (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 145

This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning-Plus system on or off.
The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW+ system. The “Warning Only”
Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected.
The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will pro-
LaneSense Warning vide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
LaneSense Strength during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and 5
“High”.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
ParkSense
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The avail-
Front ParkSense Volume
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The avail-
Rear ParkSense Volume
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
senses a collision with an object.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Blind Spot Alert Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
146 MULTIMEDIA

ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
of reverse.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
sign. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Intelligent Speed Limiter This setting will allow you to turn the Intelligent Speed Limiter on or off.
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed
New Speed Zone Indication limit has changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”,
and “Visual + Chime”.
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any
Drowsy Driver changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will vibrate the steering wheel when a lane departure is
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
detected. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 147
Target Battery Level

When the Target Battery Level button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays a setting related to the battery level.

This setting will adjust the battery level. The available settings are “40%”,
Target Battery Level
“60%”, and “80%”.
Power Level
When the Power Level button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the power level. The available option is:

This setting will change the Power Level options. The available settings 5
Power Level
are “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”.
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will turn the Auto Folding Side Mirrors on or off.
148 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.

This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights depen-
dent on the amount of visible light. The greater the sensitivity set, the
less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a
Headlight Sensitivity
setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights turn on earlier than in levels
1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”, “
Level 2: Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
Headlight Off Delay lights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
Headlight Illumination On Approach lights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
MULTIMEDIA 149

Greeting Lights This setting will turn the Greeting Lights on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large
Cornering Lights or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light)
will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
This setting will lower the headlights when driving on the opposite side of
Headlight Dip
the road. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
5
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.

This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
Auto Unlock On Exit
the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
Sound Horn With Lock pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
150 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
Sound Horn With Remote Start
the key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Passive Entry
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising
Power Liftgate Alert
or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
the power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
Auto Door Locks
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA 151
Seats & Comfort

When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
Start comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the com-
fort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate
the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
5
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These
settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.

This setting will keep the radio running after the engine is turned off.
Radio Off Delay When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available
settings are “0 min” and “20 min”.
This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available
Radio Off With Door
settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
Headlight Off Delay on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
152 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
Balance/Fade back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
Equalizer
audio.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher set-
Speed Adjusted Volume ting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The avail-
able settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
AUX Volume Offset
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
Auto Play
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
MULTIMEDIA 153
Audio Repetition
When the Audio Repetition button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the system’s audio settings. The available
setting is:

Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description 5

This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Clus-
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
ter Display.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are
Do Not Disturb “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
154 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
Tune Start
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
Channel Skip
list will display of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Subscription Information
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings

When the Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.

This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all per-
Clear Personal Data
sonal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
MULTIMEDIA 155
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.

Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION 1 — Radio Button

NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
2 — Media Button
SYSTEM O VERVIEW purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
3 — Climate Button ware for your vehicle.
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button 5
7 — Settings Button
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

156 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Radio/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 158.
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
Phone
phone system Ú page 169.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio sys-
tem off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated

Controls
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
Climate
control functions Ú page 46.
MULTIMEDIA 157
DRAG & D ROP MENU B AR SAFETY AND G ENERAL I NFORMATION  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
The Uconnect features and services in the main Safety Guidelines to the product. See an authorized dealer for
menu bar are easily customized for your repair.
preference. Simply follow these steps: WARNING!
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the to a level that still allows you to hear outside
steering wheel. You have full responsibility traffic and emergency vehicles.
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to  The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci- tronic device. Do not let young children use
dent involving serious injury or death. the system.
5
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
Please read this manual carefully before using
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop the system. It contains instructions on how to Exercise caution when setting the volume on
use the system in a safe and effective manner. the system.
1. Press the Apps button to open the App Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
screen.  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
Doing so can result in damage to the
ture away from the system. Besides damage
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app touchscreen.
to the system, moisture can cause electric
to replace an existing shortcut in the main Please read and follow these safety shocks as with any electronic device.
menu bar. precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage. NOTE:
NOTE: Many features of this system are speed depen-
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in  Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
PARK. If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, use some of the touchscreen features while the
park in a safe location and set the parking vehicle is in motion.
brake.
158 MULTIMEDIA
Care And Maintenance The following describes the left-hand control

 Do not press the touchscreen with any hard operation in each mode:
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, Radio Operation
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
 Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly the next available station and pushing the
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the available station.
touchscreen.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
 If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened Remote Sound System Controls control will tune to the next preset station that
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch you have programmed in the radio presets.
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water with a push button in the center and controls
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the Media Mode
the volume and mode of the sound system.
solvent manufacturer's precautions and Pushing the top of the rocker switch will Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
directions Ú page 360. increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
UCONNECT MODES forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
Pushing the center button will make the radio goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS switch between the various modes available beginning of the previous track if it is within
The remote sound system controls are located (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.). eight seconds after the current track begins to
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
three and nine o’clock positions. a push button in the center. The function of the will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
left-hand control is different depending on seconds into the current track.
which mode you are in.
MULTIMEDIA 159
RADIO MODE The radio is equipped with the following modes: Tune/Scroll Control
 AM Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
Radio Controls
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
 FM
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to Seek

enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
Mode. station display or by pressing the left steering
Volume & On/Off Control wheel audio control button up or down.
5
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn Seek Up and Seek Down
on and off the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
The electronic volume control turns Down button to tune the radio to the next
1 — Radio Bands
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
2 — Preset Radio Stations without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations control knob clockwise increases the volume, station after passing through the entire band
4 — Status Bar and counterclockwise decreases it. two times, the radio will stop at the station
5 — Browse Button
When the audio system is turned on, the sound where it began.
6 — Seek Down
will be set at the same volume level as last
7 — Tune Button Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
played.
8 — Seek Up Press and hold, and then release the Seek
9 — Audio Settings Mute Button
Up or Seek Down button to advance the
10 — Bottom Bar Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the radio through the available stations or channels
system.
160 MULTIMEDIA
at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next GO SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
available station or channel when the button on Once the last digit of a station has been Equipped
the touchscreen is released. entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
NOTE: close, and the system will automatically tune to
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or that station.
Seek Down button will scan the different Radio Voice Commands
frequency bands at a slower rate. Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
Direct Tune SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel. Push the VR button on the steering wheel Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
Press the available number button on the and wait for the beep to say a command. See SiriusXM®
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired some examples below.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
station. Once a number has been entered, any  “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
numbers that are no longer possible (stations provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
that cannot be reached) will become SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
deactivated/grayed out. Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
Undo what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
push the VR button and say “Help”. The Manual kit for more information.
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
system provides you with a list of commands.
Back button on the touchscreen. SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
MULTIMEDIA 161
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See When the Radio does not have the necessary  The SiriusXM® function buttons are
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete subscription, the Radio is able to receive the displayed below the Program Information.
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or Preview channel only. Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
All fees and programming subject to change. To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio In addition to the tuning operation functions
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/ common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112 Weather button, and Favorite button functions
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
service is available throughout their satellite (French).
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM® NOTE: 5
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
This functionality is only available for radios The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to SXM button on the touchscreen.
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
When in Satellite Mode:
outside with a clear view to the sky.
 The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
lighted.
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the Radio
radio does not receive a signal in underground top of the screen. 1 — Browse
parking garages or tunnels.  The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed 2 — Replay
No Subscription in the center. 3 — Seek Down Button
 The Program Information is displayed at the 4 — Direct Tune Button
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
bottom of the Channel Number. 5 — Seek Up Button
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
6 — Audio Settings Button
162 MULTIMEDIA
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched,
content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay
time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at
Play/Pause
any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing
Rewind the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore,
Forward
cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also
forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is release.
Live Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
Favorites The favorites feature enables you to set a The maximum number of favorites that can be
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen favorite artist or song that is currently playing. stored in the Radio is 50.
to activate the favorites menu, which will time The radio then uses this information to alert you
out within 20 seconds in absence of user when either the favorite artist or song is being
interaction. played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
MULTIMEDIA 163
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to Presets — If Equipped
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® at the left of the Browse screen.
button on the touchscreen. Channel List.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set This Screen contains many submenus. You can and Down arrows located at the right side of the
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on exit submenus to return to a parent menu by screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song pressing the Back arrow. the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
button on the touchscreen. All Preset Selection
Browse In SXM Press the All button on the Browse Screen. A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
When pressing the All button, the following listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
categories become available: button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the 5
 Channel List Press the Channel List to display currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Deleting A Preset
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper- A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
ating the Tune/Scroll knob. screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button  Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You Favorites
1 — All Button
can select any desired Genre by pressing the Press the Favorites button on the Browse
2 — Presets Button
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with screen.
3 — Favorites Button
the content in the selected Genre.
4 — Game Zone Button
164 MULTIMEDIA
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit with the ability to select teams, edit the choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert selection, and set alerts. start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels On-Air one or more of your selections is airing on any
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites of the SiriusXM® channels.
list. Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently Tune Start
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the airing any of the items in the Selections list, and Tune Start begins playing the current song from
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of pressing any of the items in the list tunes the the beginning when you tune to a music
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by radio to that channel. channel using one of the 12 presets. This
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well. feature occurs the first time the preset is
Select Team — If Equipped
Remove Favorites selected during that current song.
Press the Select Team button on the
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Setting Presets
screen. Press the Delete All button on the Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or teams within the league will appear, then you
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to can select a team by pressing the
be deleted. corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
Alert Settings teams that are chosen.
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
allows you to choose from a visual alert or screen. Press the Delete All button on the
audible and visual alert when one of your touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
channels. be deleted. The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
Game Zone Alert Settings and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left buttons, located at the top of the screen.
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
MULTIMEDIA 165
When you are on a station that you wish to save When selected, the radio tunes to the station
as a preset, press and hold the numbered button stored in the Presets.
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds. Deleting Presets
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
Radio Modes. screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. corresponding preset.
You can switch between the radio presets list by Return To Main Radio Screen
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen. You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Preset Features — If Equipped when in the Browse Presets screen. 1 — Balance/Fade
Browse In AM/FM 2 — Equalizer 5
Audio Settings 3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen Press the Audio button within the settings main 4 — Surround Sound
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is menu to activate the Audio Settings screen. 5 — Loudness
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the 6 — AUX Volume Offset
Scrolling Preset List Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio 7 — Radio Off With Door
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can button. You can return to the Radio screen by
scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/ pressing the X button.
Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down
Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
166 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
Balance/Fade
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
Equalizer decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
Speed Adjusted Volume
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direc-
Surround Sound — If Equipped
tion as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
AUX Volume Offset alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
Auto Play — If Equipped device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
MULTIMEDIA 167
MEDIA M ODE USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media Bluetooth® Mode
sources available. When available, you can Overview
Operating Media Mode select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options: Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
 Now Playing device, containing music, to the Uconnect
 Artists system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
 Albums
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
 Genres communicate with the Uconnect system.
 Songs To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the 5
 Playlists touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
 Folders Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
1 — Repeat
Info button on the touchscreen for artist
2 — Select Source
information on the current song playing.
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle Types of Media Modes
5 — Info
USB Mode
6 — Bluetooth®
7 — Tracks Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
Audio Source Selection device into the USB Port, or by selecting the USB Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select button on the touchscreen and Source Select/Select Source button and then
the desired mode button on the touchscreen. selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
168 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Mode Seek Up /Seek Down button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
Overview screen. The center of the browse window shows
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
items and its sub-functions, which can be
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio device. Press and release the Seek Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the touchscreen to return to the
also be used to scroll.
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or beginning of the current selection, or to return
under the Source Select button (if equipped). to the beginning of the previous selection if the Media Mode
USB device is within the first three seconds of In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
the current selection. touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the USB.
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
and begin to play. selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and the touchscreen to select the desired audio
release the Seek Down button on the source: Bluetooth®.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device AUX.
is within the first second of the current
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the selection. Repeat
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
Browse In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
the attached device. In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
NOTE: highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
displays a list of ways you can browse through
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
MULTIMEDIA 169
as the repeat function is active. To cancel highlight a track (indicated by the line above  “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time. and below the track name) and then push the Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track. Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB supports this feature, press the Tracks button touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device in random order to provide an interesting on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the device. Your Voice Command must match
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the Song List. The currently playing song is exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature indicated by a red arrow and lines above and information is displayed.
off. below the song title.
PHONE MODE
Audio Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the Overview
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the pop-up. Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, 5
Audio button Ú page 159.
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Media Voice Commands
Info It allows you to dial a phone number with your
Uconnect offers connections via USB, mobile phone.
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
button on the touchscreen to display the The feature supports the following:
operation is only available for connected USB
current track information. Press the Info or X
and AUX devices. Voice Activated Features
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature. Push the VR button located on the steering  Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Tracks
commands and follow the prompts to switch  Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks your media source or choose an artist. incoming SMS messages.
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is  “Change source to Bluetooth®”
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
indicated by an arrow and lines above and  “Change source to AUX” one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
below the song title. When in the Tracks List incoming calls/text messages.
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to  “Change source to USB”
170 MULTIMEDIA
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). NOTE:

Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
WARNING!
 Calling Back the last incoming call number
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
(“Call Back”).
properly. steering wheel. You have full responsibility
 Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming and assume all risks related to the use of the
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Uconnect features and applications in this
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”). vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
will automatically mute your radio when using
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
 Searching Contacts phone number (“Search the Uconnect Phone.
dent involving serious injury or death.
for John Smith Mobile”). For Uconnect customer support:
Screen Activated Features  US visit UconnectPhone.com or call The Phone feature is driven through your
 Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. 877-855-8400 Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-  Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call global standard that enables different
books displayed on the touchscreen. 800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call electronic devices to connect to each other
800-387-9983
 Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
screen. between the system and your mobile phone as has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to 10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent mute the system's microphone for private to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
Call logs. conversation. paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
 Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS be used with the system at a time.
Messages. Phone Button
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for The Phone button on your steering wheel is
easy access to connect to them quickly. used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
MULTIMEDIA 171
view phonebook, etc. When you press the You will be prompted for a specific command Natural Speech
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your and then guided through the available options. Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
signal to give a command.  Prior to giving a voice command, one must Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
Voice Command Button wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen” engine.
prompt or another prompt. Natural speech allows the user to speak
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you  For certain operations, compound commands in phrases or complete sentences.
are already in a call or want to make another commands can be used. For example, The system filters out certain non-word
call. instead of saying “Call” and then “John utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following The system handles fill-in words such as “I
The button on your steering wheel is also used would like to”.
compound command can be said: “Call John
to access the Voice Commands for the
Smith mobile.” The system handles multiple inputs in the same
Uconnect Voice Command features if your 5
vehicle is equipped.  For each feature explanation in this section, phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
only the compound command form of the call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
Phone Operation voice command is given. You can also break the same phrase or sentence, the system
the commands into parts and say each part identifies the topic or context and provides the
Operation associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
of the command when you are asked for it.
Voice commands can be used to operate the For example, you can use the compound you want to call?” in the case where a phone
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu command form voice command “Search for call was requested but the specific name was
structure. Voice commands are required after John Smith,” or you can break the compound not recognized.
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two command form into two voice commands: The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
general methods for how Voice Command “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John system requires more information from the
works: Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect user, it will ask a question to which the user can
Phone works best when you talk in a normal respond without pushing the Voice Command
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
conversational tone, as if speaking to button on the steering wheel.
Smith mobile”.
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
2. Say the individual commands and allow the you.
system to guide you to complete the task.
172 MULTIMEDIA
Help Command phone pairing is the process of establishing a 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you wireless connection between a cellular phone position.
want to know your options at any prompt, say and the Uconnect system.
2. Press the Phone button.
“Help” following the beep. To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual. NOTE:
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete  If there are no phones currently connected
steering wheel and say a command or say mobile phone compatibility information. with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
the VR button or the Phone button.
 This pop-up only appears when the user
Cancel Command enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
has a phone previously paired, even if no
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
phone is currently connected with the
menu.
system, this pop-up will not appear.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
is listening for a command and be returned to Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 4. Search for available devices on your
the main or previous menu. Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone  Press the Settings button on your mobile
 You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone.
Use this QR code to access your
phone to complete this procedure.
digital experience.  Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
To begin using your Uconnect  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
Phone, you must pair your phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
compatible Bluetooth®- connections.
enabled mobile phone. Mobile NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
MULTIMEDIA 173
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make the highest priority. This phone will take  “Show Paired Phones”
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the precedence over other paired phones within
NOTE:
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone. range and will connect to the Uconnect
Software updates on your phone or the
system automatically when entering the
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to Uconnect system may interfere with the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone repeat the pairing process. However, first make
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
main screen. sure to delete the device from the list of phones
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
 Press the Paired Phones button. mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
screen, and the Uconnect system will
 Search for available devices on your phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone, Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
NOTE: 5
select “Uconnect” and accept the For phones which are not made a favorite, the 1. Press the Media button on the
connection request. phone priority is determined by the order in touchscreen to begin.
which it was paired. The most recent phone
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress 2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
paired will have the higher priority.
screen while the system is connecting.
NOTE: 3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
7. When your mobile phone finds the touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.” During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect Devices screen.
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, system to access your “messages” and 4. Press the Add Device button on the
accept the connection request from “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync touchscreen.
Uconnect. your contacts with the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
9. When the pairing process has successfully You can also use the following VR command to If there is no device currently connected with
completed, the system will prompt you to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any the system, a pop-up will appear.
choose whether or not this is your favorite screen on the radio:
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
174 MULTIMEDIA
5. Search for available devices on your Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When Audio Device After Pairing Device
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
shown on the Uconnect screen. the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process Device within range. If you need to choose a
screen while the system is connecting. particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to 1. Press the Settings button on the
choose whether or not this is your favorite touchscreen.
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
the highest priority. This device will take buttons. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
precedence over other paired devices 1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
within range. 3. Press to select the particular phone or the 2 — Make Favorite
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will 3 — Delete Device/Phone
NOTE: appear; press “Connect Phone”.
For devices which are not made a favorite, the 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
device priority is determined by the order in 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen. Settings button.
which it was paired. The most recent device
paired will have the higher priority. 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices: 3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
 “Show Paired Phones”
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
MULTIMEDIA 175
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook  A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped four numbers per contact will be downloaded
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete and updated every time a phone is
Device button on the touchscreen. If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and connected to the Uconnect Phone.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings number entries from the mobile phone’s  Depending on the maximum number of entries
screen. phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with downloaded, there may be a short delay before
Phonebook Access Profile may support this the latest downloaded names can be used.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite feature. Your mobile phone may receive a Until then, if available, the previously down-
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect loaded phonebook is available for use.
screen, press the Settings button located system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts  Only the phonebook of the currently
to the right of the device name for a
with the Uconnect system. connected mobile phone is accessible.
different phone or audio device than the 5
currently connected device or press the See the Uconnect website,  This downloaded phonebook cannot be
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list. UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones. edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.  To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
phonebook, follow the procedure in the updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the “Voice Command” in this section.
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device phone connection.
move to the top of the list.  Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
screen. made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
176 MULTIMEDIA
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Call Controls
There are two ways you can add an entry to your Favorite. The touchscreen allows you to control the
favorites: Phone Call Features following call features:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press The following features can be accessed through
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
and then press one of the +Add Favorite available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
Contact buttons that appears on the list. mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen,
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
and then select the appropriate number.
for the features that you have.
Press the Down Arrow button next to the
selected number to display the option’s Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to Uconnect: 1 — Answer
Favorites”.  Redial 2 — End
NOTE: 3 — Mute/Unmute
 Dial by pressing in the number
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to 4 — Transfer
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, 5 — Join Calls
remove an existing favorite.
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped Call Back) Other phone call features include:
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”  Favorites  End Call

from the Phone main screen.  Mobile Phonebook  Hold/Unhold/Resume
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the  Recent Call Log  Swap two active calls
contact you want to remove from your
 SMS Message Viewer
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
MULTIMEDIA 177
Key Pad Number Entry Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress Currently In Progress
1. Press the Phone button.
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, If a call is currently in progress and you have
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle another incoming call, you will hear the same
touchscreen. audio system. Push the Phone button on the network tones for call waiting that you normally
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. steering wheel, press the Answer button on the hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
touchscreen. Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
4. Use the numbered buttons on the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
touchscreens to enter the number and You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call. Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
press “Dial/Call”. and answer the incoming call.
Recent Calls — If Equipped NOTE:
You may browse a list of the most recent of each Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect 5
of the following call types: system in the market today do not support
 All Calls rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received an incoming call or ignore it.
 Outgoing Calls or Calls Made Do Not Disturb
 Missed Calls With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
Calls button on the phone main screen. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
You can also push the VR button on your 1 — Answer Button there is a counter display to keep track of your
steering wheel and perform the above 2 — Caller ID Box missed calls and text messages while Do Not
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming Disturb is active.
calls”.
178 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Join Calls
text message, a call, or both when declining an Progress When two calls are in progress (one active and
incoming call and send it to voicemail. You can place a call on hold by pressing the one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button
Automatic reply messages can be: Hold button on the Phone main screen, then on the Phone main screen to combine all calls
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by into a conference call.
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
shortly”. Call Termination
from the phonebooks.
 Create a custom auto reply message up to To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
160 characters. Toggling Between Calls End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
NOTE:
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
call.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
Redial
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls. Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
 Reply with text message is not compatible that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
with iPhones®.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one Call Continuation
 Auto reply with text message is only available on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message Call continuation is the progression of a phone
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
Access Profile (MAP). call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
on hold at a time.
ignition has been switched to OFF.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call. NOTE:
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On The call will remain within the vehicle audio
Hold button on the Phone main screen. system until the phone becomes out of range
MULTIMEDIA 179
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Number and name recognition rate is optimized
mended to press the Transfer button on the when the entries are not similar. You can say
 Low Road Noise
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle. “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
 Smooth Road Surface Even though international dialing for most
Advanced Phone Connectivity
 Fully Closed Windows number combinations is supported, some
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone shortcut dialing number combinations may not
 Dry Weather Conditions be supported.
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without Audio Performance
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call WARNING!
Audio quality is maximized under:
from your connected mobile phone to the ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the wheel. You have full responsibility and  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Transfer button on the Phone main screen. assume all risks related to the use of the  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed 5
Uconnect features and applications in this
Things You Should Know About Uconnect Low Road Noise
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to 
Phone do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
 Smooth Road Surface
Voice Command dent involving serious injury or death.
 Fully Closed Windows
For the best performance:
Even though the system is designed for many  Dry Weather Conditions
 Always wait for the beep before speaking languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.  Operation From The Driver's Seat
 Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ NOTE: Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
meters away from you It is recommended that you do not store names loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
 Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period in motion. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
180 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Voice Commands Voice Text Reply — If Equipped

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is Uconnect can announce incoming text RESPONSES
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button messages. Push the VR button or Phone I’ll call you I need See you in 5
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system button and say: later. directions. <or 10, 15,
is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile 20, 25, 30,
1. “Listen” to have the system read an
phone compatibility and pairing instructions. I’m on my 45, 60> min-
incoming text message. (Must have Can’t talk
way. utes.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep compatible mobile phone paired to right now.
to say a command. See some examples below: Uconnect system.) I’m lost. Thanks.
 “Call John Smith” 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has NOTE:
 “Dial 123 456 7890” been read. Only use the numbering listed in the provided
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone the message.
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
number)
es and follow the system prompts.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
 “Call back” (call previously answered full implementation of the Message Access Profile
incoming phone number) PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For
Did You Know: When providing a Voice details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Stuck in
Command, push the Phone button and say Yes. See you later. Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
traffic.
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it incoming text messages only. For further
appears in your phonebook. When a contact Start without
No. I’ll be late. information on how to enable this feature on your
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call me.
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User
John Smith work”. Where are I will be 5 <or Manual”.
Okay.
you? 10, 15, 20,
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
25, 30, 45,
Are you there 60> minutes compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
Call me. equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
yet? late.
voice to send a text message.
MULTIMEDIA 181
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior 1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
When used with your Apple® iPhone® to using the system Ú page 360. Google Play store on your
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri Android™-powered smartphone.
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
2. Connect your Android™-powered
select media, place phone calls and much EQUIPPED smartphone to one of the media USB ports
more. Siri uses your natural language to in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
understand what you mean and responds back ANDROID AUTO™ was not downloaded, the first time you plug
to confirm your requests. The system is
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect your device in the app begins to download.
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
powered smartphone with a data plan, that you use the app.
perform useful tasks.
allows you to project your smartphone and a
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the NOTE:
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
5
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, information, and organizes it into simple cards that came with your phone, as aftermarket
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get that appear just when they are needed. Android cables may not work.
directions, read text messages, and many other
Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class
useful requests.
speech technology, the steering wheel controls,
Bluetooth® Communication Link the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
many of your apps. To use Android Auto™,
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
perform the following procedure:
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is NOTE:
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Power-Up
Auto™ features may or may not be available in Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either every region and/or language.
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
182 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Maps iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio playable

To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an Push and hold the Voice Recognition application. Using your smartphone’s data plan,
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may (VR) button on the steering wheel you can stream endless music on the road.
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is until the beep or tap the Microphone NOTE:
shown in the upper right corner of the radio icon to ask Google to take you to a Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
screen. Data plan rates apply. desired destination by voice. You can also touch up on your smartphone prior to using Android
3. Once the device is connected and the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & other navigation apps.
NOTE:
drop menu bar changes to the Android While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
To see the track details for the music playing
Auto™ icon. provides voice-guided:
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
NOTE:  Navigation system’s media screen.
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately  Live traffic information For further information, refer to https://
once a compatible device is connected. You can support.google.com/androidauto.
also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™  Lane guidance
icon on the touchscreen. For further information, refer to Communication
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https:// With Android Auto™ connected, push
Uconnect system, the following features can be www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada). and hold the VR button on the
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: steering wheel to activate voice
For further information on the navigation
recognition specific to Android Auto™.
 Google Maps™ for navigation function, please refer to https://
This allows you to send and reply to text
support.google.com/android or https://
 Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. messages, have incoming text messages read
support.google.com/androidauto/.
for music out loud, and place and receive hands-free
Music calls.
 Hands-free calling and texting for communi-
Android Auto™ allows you to access, Apps
cation
stream, and play your favorite music
The Android Auto™ App displays all the
 Various compatible apps with apps like Google Play Music,
compatible apps that are available to use with
MULTIMEDIA 183
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
must have the compatible app downloaded, the steering wheel, or press and hold the your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
and you must be signed in to the app through “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
your mobile device for it to work with Android activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
NOTE:
Auto™. natural voice commands, to use a list of your
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list smartphone’s features:
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
of available apps for Android Auto™.  Maps CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ Voice Command  Music
Phone To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
NOTE: 
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
 Text Messages Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
the very first connection only, and then use the
5
Auto™ features may or may not be available in  Additional Apps
following procedure:
every region and/or language.
NOTE:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to Requires compatible smartphone running
USB ports in your vehicle.
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
technology through your vehicle’s voice Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and NOTE:
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
data plan to project your Android™-powered cable that came with your phone, as after-
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your APPLE CARPLAY® market cables may not work.
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™ Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports, CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
using the factory-provided USB cable, and press your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
184 MULTIMEDIA
2. Once the device is connected and with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular Music
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & coverage is shown on the left side of the radio Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
drop menu bar changes to the Apple screen. Data plan rates apply. all your artists, playlists, and music
CarPlay® Icon. from iTunes® or any third party
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
NOTE: Uconnect system, the following features can be application installed on your device.
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan: Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
You can also launch it by pressing the Apple use select third party audio apps including
 Phone music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.
 Music
Messages
 Messages Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
 Maps
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
Phone allows you to use Siri to send or reply
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
the VR button on the steering wheel to text messages, but drivers will not be able to
activate a Siri voice recognition read messages, as everything is done via voice.
session. You can also press and hold Maps
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
Push and hold the VR button on the
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage steering wheel until the beep or tap
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
the Microphone icon to ask Apple®
1 — LTE Data Coverage Siri on your iPhone®.
Siri to take you to a desired
2 — Apple CarPlay®
NOTE: destination by voice. You can also touch the
NOTE: Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR Apple® Maps.
data is turned on, and that you are in an area session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
MULTIMEDIA 185
Apps “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button setup required every time it is within range, if
apps that are available to use, every time it is on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Bluetooth® is turned on.
launched. You must have the compatible app Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
NOTE:
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
app through your mobile device for it to work to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
with Apple CarPlay®.  Phone connections to function. The connected device
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/  Music is unavailable to other devices when connected
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/ using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of  Messages
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
available apps for Apple CarPlay®. Maps — If Equipped
 System — If Equipped
5
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command  Additional Apps — If Equipped It is possible to have multiple devices
NOTE: connected to the Uconnect system. For
NOTE: example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
Feature availability depends on your carrier and Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis- place hands-free phone calls or send
features may not be available in every region tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
and/or language. hands-free text messages. However, another
terms of use and privacy statements apply. device can also be paired to the Uconnect
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to ANDROID AUTO™ AND A PPLE system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice the passenger can stream music.
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s C ARPLAY® T IPS AND T RICKS
data plan to project your iPhone® and a NOTE:
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
number of its apps onto your Uconnect Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
Bluetooth® Pairing
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher launched from the front and center console
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple USB ports only.
to one of the media USB ports, using the
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
186 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF WARNING!

Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
EQUIPPED ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to 1-877-855-8400.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED? on the steering wheel. You have full responsi- Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are bility and assume all risks related to the use (English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
connected vehicles. These buttons will be of the features and applications in this vehi- Business Hours
located on either the rearview mirror or cle. Only use the features and applications
Central Time
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you result in an accident involving serious injury  Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to
have a connected radio and can take or death. 10:00 pm
advantage of the many connected vehicle  Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
features. NOTE:
For further information about the ASSIST and SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SOS buttons Ú page 271. transmission and use of data from your vehicle SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
Ú page 210. in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE which receives GPS signals and communicates
SERVICES SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
And Business Hours center via wireless and landline
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care communications networks. Depending on the
Uconnect system is that you can now take
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon- type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected 
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
1-844-796-4827 (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
 Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri- Guardian™ is available only on equipped
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ or call vehicles purchased within the continental
1-877-324-9091 United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
Canada.
MULTIMEDIA 187
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian™ provides: Activation

 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are  The ability to remotely lock/unlock and To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
dependent upon an operative telematics remote start your vehicle from virtually Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
device, a cellular connection, navigation map anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
data, and GPS satellite signal reception, computer.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
which can limit the ability to reach the  Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App. in-vehicle touchscreen.
response center or reach emergency Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
support. and send your locations directly to your 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
Uconnect Navigation. list of apps.
 Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly  The ability to locate your vehicle, when you 3. For customers in the United States, select
in remote or enclosed areas. forget where you parked, using the Vehicle “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will 5
 Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM Finder function of the Uconnect App.
activate services in your vehicle, or select
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical For customers in Canada, enter your email
Guardian™ services.
system or other important parts of your address to activate services in your vehicle.
vehicle, network congestion, civil distur- The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
bances, actions of third parties or the govern- Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Your new vehicle may come with an included trial
location of your vehicle, such as in an under- Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
ground parking structure or under a bridge. Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are The SOS Call button connects you directly to To get started with your trial, enrollment in
available for all models. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. The Uconnect
assistance in an emergency. 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of SiriusXM
Guardian™ services from your date of purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
188 MULTIMEDIA
Features And Packages  Download the Uconnect app to your mobile

After the trial period, you must purchase a device.
subscription to continue your services by calling  Use your Owner Account login and password
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent. to open the app and then set up a PIN.
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED
V EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using connected
services.
 For customers in the United States, visit

www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/
Register button in the upper right-hand
corner to register your account online.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
Uconnect Mobile App c. You will then receive an email notification
1 — Settings to confirm/verify your newly created
2 — Vehicle Info account.
3 — Location And Send & Go
4 — Remote Commands
MULTIMEDIA 189
d. After clicking the email link, it will take Start, and activate your horn and lights For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
you to a website and prompt you to remotely, if equipped. button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
assign your account with a password. Health Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will
 Press the Location button on the bottom
then prompt you to log in using your email
e. Once you have added a password, the menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
address and password.
website will direct you to your homepage locate your vehicle or send a location to your
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN. Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.  Edit/Edit Profile:
 Press the Settings side menu in the upper left To manage the details of your SiriusXM
 For customers in Canada, register your Guardian™ account, such as your contact
account via your vehicle. corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers. information, password and SiriusXM
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
menu bar. Using Your Owner’s Site button to access the details of your account.
Your Owner’s Site website https://  Connected Services Status: 5
b. Press the Activate Services button from www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
the apps list. This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir- you with all the information you need, all in one
place. You can track your service history, find  Remote Commands:
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address. recommended accessories for your vehicle, For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
watch videos about your vehicle's features, and Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the easily access your manuals. It is also where you icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
confirmation email. It may take a short can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
time before remote services will be avail- This section will familiarize you with the key equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
able, but you will be able to log into the elements of the website that will help you get horn and flash the lights.
Uconnect App and the owner’s site. the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Editing Your Notifications
 Once on the Remote screen and you have set For customers in the United States, press the Notifications are an important element of your
up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Sign In/Register button and enter your email SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle address and password. time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
190 MULTIMEDIA
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A NOTE:
to notify you of the event. To set up the Button Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
notifications, please follow these instructions. dependent on an operational Uconnect system,
Center Light Status Description cellular network availability that is compatible
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https:// Off No call activated with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
Green Active call in progress network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle” Red System error
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
and then “Dashboard”.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance How It Works
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button. Features
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
light will turn green indicating a call has
where can edit Notification Preferences. onboard assistance features located on the
been placed.
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email to enhance your driving experience if you should NOTE:
address to notify you, and you can ever need assistance or support.
customize the types of messages.  In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
Description pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in the SOS call is placed. The system will
contact with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer verbally alert you that a call is about to be
SOS Call made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
Care agent in the event of an emergency. When
the connection between the vehicle and the live push the SOS Call button on the rearview
WARNING! mirror or press the Cancel button on the
agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, includ- transmit location information. In the event of a touchscreen within 10 seconds.
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call minor collision, medical or any other  During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
will NOT work without a network connection emergency, press the SOS button to be phone is disconnected so incoming or
compatible with your device. connected to a call center agent who can send outgoing calls will go through your mobile
emergency assistance to your vehicle’s device versus the hands-free system which is
location. not available due to the SOS Call.
MULTIMEDIA 191
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and  The light will continuously be illuminated red.  Network congestion.
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
 The screen will display the following message  Weather conditions.
is made, the agent will stay on the line with
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
you.  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
contact your dealer.”
tunnels.
NOTE:
 An in-vehicle audio message will state
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the If your vehicle loses battery power for any
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may reason (including during or after an accident)
contact your dealer.”
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, systems, will not operate.
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
Requirements
consent to being recorded. prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the  This feature is available only on vehicles sold 5
SOS Call System Limitations following factors: in the US or Canada.
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US  The ignition key is in OFF position.  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be
have limited services. In particular, responses  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
to SOS calls or other emergency services may intact. have an active subscription that includes the
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes applicable feature.
purchased outside the United States and disconnected during a vehicle crash.
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
Guardian™ services.  The SOS Call system software and/or hard- data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash. compatible with your device.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the  LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
malfunction is detected: and/or GPS signals are unavailable or ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
obstructed. tioning electrical system.
192 MULTIMEDIA
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

 Never place anything on or near the  The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the and regular inspection of your vehicle may
(data) and GPS antennas. You could instrument panel if a malfunction in any result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and part of the air bag system is detected. If the
GPS signal reception, which can prevent Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air Remote Commands
your vehicle from placing an emergency bag system may not be working properly
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
call. and the SOS Call system may not be able to
access to several vehicle features that can be
 Do not add any aftermarket electrical send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™
controlled remotely from your mobile device.
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical Customer Care center. If the Air Bag
These features include locking/unlocking,
system. This may prevent your vehicle from Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle remote starting, and activating the horn and
sending a signal to initiate an emergency lights of the vehicle.
call. To avoid interference that can cause immediately.
the SOS Call system to fail, never add after-  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile mean you will not have SOS Call services if
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu-
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the minated, have an authorized dealer service
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE the SOS Call system immediately.
LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
DENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS
road conditions or location), do not wait for
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ SERVICES
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
WILL OPERATE.
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
(Continued) exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA 193
Press this button to 2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
1 — Lock SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
lock your vehicle.
Press this button to
same four-digit code established when you
2 — Vehicle Start activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
start your vehicle.
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Press this button to
Security PIN on the keypad.
3 — Horn & Lights sound the horn and
activate your lights. 3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
Press this button to command to go through to your vehicle.
4 — Unlock
unlock your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
5 — Cancel Vehicle Press this button to was received by your vehicle.
Start cancel remote start.
Using A Remote Command Through Your 5
Remote Commands lets you send a request to Owner’s Site
your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
 Anywhere using your mobile device and
username and password you used when
Uconnect App
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
 From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not services in your vehicle.
available on all functions)
NOTE:
 Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer If you forgot your username or password, links
Care (not available on all functions) are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Remote Commands
Device And The Uconnect App 2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon
vehicle you want to send the command to by
on your mobile device.
clicking on its image along the top.
194 MULTIMEDIA
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote NOTE: be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
commands. Press the desired icon to Anyone with access to your PIN may request data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
activate that feature. Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
4. You will then be asked to enter your Guardian™ and have an active subscription
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the Remote Door Lock/Unlock that includes the applicable feature.
same four-digit code established when you
Description  An ignition cycle is required for some remote
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
system). Please enter your SiriusXM The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a
Guardian™ Security PIN. you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
5. A message will appear on the screen to let distance.  Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
you know if the command was received by not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
your vehicle. Working Vehicle Conditions
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
 The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. call.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell NOTE:
tower reception. All other remote services should be performed
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle
Wi-Fi connection. App on your compatible device.
through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Requirements Remote Vehicle Start
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Description
your identity by asking for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ system. The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN. with the ability to start the engine on your
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a distance. Once started, the preset climate
If using the Uconnect App to command your
remote command. controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
down the interior.
MULTIMEDIA 195
You can also send a command to turn off an  The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank If you want, you can set up push notifications
engine that has been started using Remote of fuel, along with oil and battery power. every time a command is sent to turn on the
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not horn and lights.
 The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine Working Vehicle Conditions
will shut off automatically.  If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto-
matic transmission.  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
system. tower reception. tower reception.
You can set up push notifications every time a  Your mobile device must have a cellular or  Your mobile device must have a cellular or
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote Wi-Fi connection. Wi-Fi connection.
Start.
 If the Panic button has been pressed, the NOTE: 5
Working Vehicle Conditions The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
vehicle must be started at least once after
 The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode. alarming the system. to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
 The vehicle has been started with the key fob NOTE: are responsible for compliance with local laws,
within the last 14 days. The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents rules and ordinances in the location of your
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
 The vehicle’s security system has been assistance. Roadside Assistance Call
armed and not triggered since the last Description
vehicle start. Remote Horn & Lights
Description Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
 The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are system feature will contain an ASSIST button in
closed. It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and services have been activated, the ASSIST
 The vehicle’s check engine light must be off. lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason.
196 MULTIMEDIA
button can connect you directly to customer How It Works monitor your conversations with Roadside
care call centers. You will be directed to one of Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
the four services below. and you will be presented with your ASSIST SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
 Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need options on the touchscreen. Make your such conversations are initiated through the
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who selection by pressing the touchscreen. SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
can help anytime. via a landline or mobile device, and may share
Requirements information obtained through such recording
 Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM  This feature is available only on vehicles sold and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti- in the US and Canada. requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
vate your services, renew after your trial has consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
expired, and for in-vehicle support for your  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the of information obtained through any such call
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help SiriusXM Guardian™ system. recordings.
answering any general questions
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
surrounding your connected services. Send & Go
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
 Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all Description
non-connected Uconnect system features,  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections. Guardian™ and have an active subscription
allows you to search for a destination on your
that includes the applicable feature.
 Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle. mobile device, and then send the route to your
 Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or vehicle’s navigation system.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
Features tioning electrical system.
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has Disclaimers
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
to enhance your driving experience if you should vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
ever need assistance or support. additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
MULTIMEDIA 197
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, press the search box
to browse through one of the categories pro-
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
5
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
 View the location on a map.
 See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
 Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
Send & Go Send & Go Input
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
198 MULTIMEDIA
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ Vehicle Finder
by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection Description
the pop-up that appears on the radio compatible with your device.
touchscreen. The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
Requirements vehicle.
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or to make finding your vehicle even easier.
Uconnect 4C NAV unit. How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
LTE Network Connection 2. Choose how you want to view the
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM information by pressing the layers button.
Guardian™ and have an active subscription These options will appear:
that includes the applicable feature.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators

1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 — Navigation Button
MULTIMEDIA 199
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
your location. data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
NOTE: that includes the applicable feature.
 You are responsible for using remote  Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
services that sound horn and flash lights in within 14 days.
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
nances in effect at the location of your 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
vehicle. Description
5
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
dependent on a properly installed and opera- connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or
tional Uconnect system, cellular network 4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever
availability that is compatible with the device you are. After you've made your purchase, turn
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
 Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
available everywhere at all times, particularly
ously connected to the web.
in remote or enclosed areas.
 Connect several devices at one time.
Requirements
Vehicle Finder Layers  Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in  Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
1 — Map View motion. or any other portable-enabled media — can
2 — Satellite View connect over your private in-vehicle network.
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
3 — Hybrid View  A high-speed, secured connection lets
Uconnect system.
4 — Show Traffic anyone on your private network access the
5 — View Boundaries Web — great for working and relaxing.
200 MULTIMEDIA
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select

WARNING! the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi How To Purchase button and follow the Always drive safely with your hands on the
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so instructions. steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
may result in an accident involving serious You have full responsibility and assume all
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
injury or death. risks related to the use of the features and
to the AT&T portal to get set up.
applications in this vehicle. Only use the fea-
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your 3. For existing Connected Car customers: tures and applications in this vehicle when it
Vehicle Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist in an accident involving in serious injury or
How It Works death.
you.
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you Stolen Vehicle Assistance
internet access hotspot in the vehicle, can change its name and the password by
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing Description
using the radio as an access point.
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
devices (such as a laptop or any other view the connected devices from the app Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly screen by pressing the View Connected Devices stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a button. help recover it.
complimentary 3-month trial period that How It Works
NOTE:
includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not 1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
activated any time within the first year of new
required in order to purchase and use the 4G enforcement as soon as possible. They will
vehicle ownership.
Wi-Fi Hotspot. work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot: 2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
MULTIMEDIA 201
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report Guardian™ and have an active subscription Guardian™ subscription unless you call
number (as issued by your local law enforce- that includes the applicable feature. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
ment). If you have downloaded the them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
NOTE:
Uconnect App, you can push the “Settings” Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
menu button on your device, select “Help”, information, located at
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
and then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus- www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
remote or enclosed areas.
tomer Care” to make the call. privacy (US Residents) or
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
Monthly Vehicle Health Report www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
authenticate that you are the owner of the Description For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
vehicle and contact the law enforcement Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle report. service through which a summary of the privacy-policy. 5
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on Vehicle Health Alert
work with your local law enforcement to
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is Description
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
law enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. provided as a convenience to you and does not Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
While the investigation is ongoing, you substitute for regular maintenance to your senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key
should also contact your insurance company vehicle. systems. For further information, go to your
to inform it of the situation. In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Owner’s website.
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle
Requirements NOTE:
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
register and activate services. During this
Uconnect system. vehicle’s health and performance, your
process you will be asked to provide an email
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ address to which the reports will be sent.
features in your vehicle, and other data.
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device. This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
202 MULTIMEDIA
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped If you need assistance, you can always ask 3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Description Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands Enable.
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help
Your vehicle will send you notifications to 4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
with my car.”
remind you when services are needed, or to
Here are a few of the many questions you can 5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
alert you of other important information, such
ask Alexa®: brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK  “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my 6. Log in using your Owner Account
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to <vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.” credentials. This will be the same user
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer name and password you used when
Care agent.  “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
Connected Services.
NOTE:
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up 7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the brand> Skill.
<vehicle name>.”
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete  “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel You can now begin using the <vehicle brand>
messages. level of my <vehicle name>.” Skill on Alexa®!
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is Google Assistant — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®! for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 187. keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle across your devices, including Android™
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
to Amazon Alexa®: phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated
vehicle and remotely access key services and
speakers, like Google Home. If you need
features. 1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your assistance, ask Google for help, or for a
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect mobile device (Apple® or Android™). complete list of commands by saying: “Hey
Navigation, you can send a destination directly Google, ask <brand name> for help with my
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
to your vehicle using Alexa®. car.”
SKILLS.
MULTIMEDIA 203
Here are a few examples of commands: 4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect  Boundary Alert
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”. Receive a notification the moment your
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.” 5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address vehicle is driven either out of or into a
and password you created when you geographic boundary that you set.
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.” activated Uconnect services.  Curfew Alert
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the Receive a notification when your car is being
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send driven outside of the curfew time.
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan linking process.
to my <vehicle name>.”  Speed Alert
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Receive a notification whenever your car
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the Remotely start the engine, or cancel a
 exceeds a speed limit you set.
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.” remote start  Valet Alert 5
To link your Uconnect account with Google Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in
 Receive a notification if and when your
Assistant, follow these steps: Uconnect Navigation system vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
1. Download and install the Google Assistant radius of a valet drop-off zone.
 Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel
app on your smart phone from the App level and oil life SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Store® or Google Play.
 And more! Description
2. After installation, log in to the Google
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app
Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
account by pressing the icon in the upper Description
To get started, follow these steps:
right hand corner.
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving
and give you peace of mind when your loved 1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary Store® or Google Play.
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
brand name. limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your 2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the using the username and password you
Uconnect app to set alerts: created when you first set up your account.
204 MULTIMEDIA
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are 1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect 9. The system will verify the phone number.
connected through Bluetooth®. App drawer. Once verified, Uconnect Market will be
available to use. Press the OK button.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your 2. Press “Get Started”.
SmartWatch. From the online portal, https://
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your
phone number to receive a text message market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty
Once the app is downloaded on your
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect accounts and start receiving benefits from them
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Market. while still using Uconnect Market and view your
 Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the purchase history.
remote lock button in the app and entering NOTE:
your security PIN. If the text message does not come through,
MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™
press the Resend Text button. It might take a ACCOUNT
 Remote start or stop your vehicle.
minute to receive the text message. To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
 View important vehicle stats, such as fuel press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
4. Once you receive the text message, press
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning, SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
the link provided. You will be directed to a
and more.
sign-in screen. Enter your email and NOTE:
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube password. You will then be able to use It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
channel for SmartWatch Integration. Uconnect Market. turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
Uconnect Market 5. If you do not have an account, press Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
“Register Now” to create one.
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless
and secure transactions from the comfort of
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of
your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations, For additional information about SiriusXM
Service.
place food orders, or pay for other goods and Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen. 7. Enter your credit card information, and ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
press “Next”. Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
To get started with Uconnect Market on the to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
touchscreen: 8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”. directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
MULTIMEDIA 205
in a queue until an agent is available. If you do CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
not have an active subscription, push the LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
ASSIST button and click the Activate button on compatible with most devices with the
the touchscreen to activate services. 1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
door? Depending on various conditions, it The capabilities of these devices allow us to
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS can take up to three minutes or more for remotely command your vehicle. Other
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS the request to get to your vehicle. operating systems may be supported in the
Call button on the mirror? You have 10 future.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
seconds after pushing the SOS Call button 5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
more quickly, however its range is limited
push the SOS Call button again, or press connection from your device to send
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
these and other situations. commands to your vehicle which must have 5
touchscreen. an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
2. What type of information is sent when I use
People sometimes lose their mobile either your device or your vehicle is in an
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
devices, which is why security measures area with below average coverage, it may
Certain vehicle information, such as make
have been engineered into the Uconnect take longer to log in and send commands.
and model, is transmitted along with the
App. Asking for your username, password
last known GPS location.
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You required for the activation of Remote
can use the SOS Call button to make a call services through your mobile device. It is
if you or someone else needs emergency your responsibility to protect your
assistance. passwords and PINs.
206 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE 3. Can I select a different route than the most the horn and lights by pressing the red
ASSISTANCE FAQ S recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once Panic button.
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
1. What is the phone number for roadside the pop-up message offers a “Locations” CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN V EHICLE
assistance call? The phone number is: option. Once “Locations” is selected, you ASSISTANCE FAQ S
can choose from a list of recently sent
 US: 1-800-521-2779 1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To
destinations.
 Canada: 1-800-363-4869 enhance your privacy, and the privacy of
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
does it cover towing or other expenses FAQ S police report is required for you to activate
incurred by using roadside assistance? No, this service. You must involve local law
however your new vehicle may include 1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™
Roadside Assistance Call services. vehicle may be located by anyone who has locate your vehicle. We may also locate the
your PIN and access to your account. It is vehicle for other law enforcement or
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO your responsibility to guard your PIN government agencies, subject to a valid
accordingly. See the Uconnect and court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
FAQ S SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for do so. We will also provide the service for
1. How long does it take to send the route and more information. FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
destination to my vehicle? Depending on have purchased through them.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
various conditions, it can take up to three flash the lights? Depending on various 2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
minutes for the request to get through to conditions, it can take three minutes or After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
your vehicle. more for the request to get through to your Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? vehicle. report, the agent will work together with law
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
the engine, the pop-up message stating that your vehicle is recovered, you will be
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
you have a new route will appear. There is contacted by law enforcement.
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
MULTIMEDIA 207
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my the stadium after the game, you can use the 6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
insurance rates? Some insurance providers Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with and have the inside of your vehicle designed to work on most devices with the
systems that can deter auto theft. When comfortable by the time you get to it. Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform The capabilities of these devices allow us to
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM remotely command your vehicle. Other
device? People sometimes lose their
Guardian™ services subscription to find out operating systems may be supported in the
wireless devices, which is why security
if the insurance provider can offer you a future.
measures have been engineered into the
lower rate.
Uconnect App. Asking for your username, CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN
NOTE: password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
& L IGHTS FAQ S
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an your vehicle if they happen to find your 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and 5
insurance product. You are responsible for device. flash the lights? Depending on various
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle conditions, it can take three minutes or
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
and yourself. more for the request to get through to your
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The vehicle.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
Remote Start feature simply starts the 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
S TART FAQ S engine to warm up or cool down the interior App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
1. How long does it take to remotely start my before you arrive. flash the lights quicker; however its range is
vehicle? Depending on various conditions, 5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with limited.
it can take three minutes or more for the the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
request to get through to your vehicle. No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel turn them on? If you are close enough to the
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
App? Your key fob will remote start your the vehicle. the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic
vehicle more quickly. However its range is button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will
limited. For example, when you are leaving continue for a maximum of three minutes.
208 MULTIMEDIA
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the be good for 72 hours. Once you click the 4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been activation link, you will be prompted to fill security PIN? If you’ve already activated
designed to work on most devices with the out your information and accept Terms services and forgot your SiriusXM
Apple® and Android™ operating systems. and Conditions. Then, you will be directed Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
The capabilities of these devices allow us to to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s
remotely command your vehicle. Other complete your profile and demo the Site.
operating systems may be supported in the remote services.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
future.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without payment account address? Your SiriusXM
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQ S an email address, customers cannot Guardian™ Payment Account address can
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM need to register so they can subscribe to Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
Guardian™ account? There are three ways receive additional services and create a your vehicle. To update online: login to your
that you can register your SiriusXM SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
Guardian™ Account: remote command requests. SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
 Push the Assist button. A call will be
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ 6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
placed to an agent who can assist in security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM profile? Your name, home address, phone
registering your new account. Guardian™ Security PIN during the number, email address and SiriusXM
 Press the Activate Services icon in the registration process. The SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
Apps menu. Select the button to speak Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
with an agent, who can assist in regis- authenticate you when accessing your Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
tering your new account. account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or your personal information. Make your edits
performing any remote services, such as and click Save.
 Press the Activate Services icon in the
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Apps menu. Enter your email on the
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
touchscreen and then follow the prompts
from the provided email. You will receive
an email with an activation link that will
MULTIMEDIA 209
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ 14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM entire subscription? Prorated refunds are
come with an included trial period for Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your provided from the date of cancellation for
certain Apps and services. Owner’s Site and then update your annual plans or longer. Please see the
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™ Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms &
8. Can I access every App and service while
customer web portal. Conditions for refunds related to billing
driving? No, some applications and services
plans of other lengths and other circum-
are not available while driving. For your own 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
stances.
safety, it is not possible to use some of the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview 15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
motion (e.g. key pad). mirror. expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
9. What happens when my subscription 12. How do I update my credit card
comes up for renewal? If you have added a information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a 5
monthly subscription, your subscription will
credit card to your account information, and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
be canceled on the last day of the month in
your subscription will be automatically Guardian™ Payment Account.
which you choose to cancel.
renewed for a term length in accordance
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
with the service plan that you have selected 16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
at the then current subscription rate and on Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
Guardian™ Customer Care.
every renewal date thereafter, unless you you’ll want to remove your account
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM You also can visit your Owner’s Site and information. This process removes all
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a choose a subscription to view its expiration personal information, returns the Uconnect
credit card to your account, SiriusXM date. When your subscription is about to ex- system to its original factory settings,
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter pire, you will receive an email or letter of no- removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
in advance of your expiration date to remind tification. and account information. To remove your
you that your subscription is ending soon. account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
210 MULTIMEDIA
17. What if I forgot to remove my account privacy (US Residents) or noisy performance from your radio. This
information before I returned my lease www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). condition may be lessened or eliminated by
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM This information may be collected by SiriusXM® relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
Guardian™ Customer Care. Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the radio performance does not satisfactorily
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
diagnostic information including location data recommended that the radio volume be turned
connection compatible with my device is
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle down or off during mobile phone operation
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
Health Report to you. when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/ Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ REGULATORY AND SAFETY
data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health I NFORMATION
Services that required your smartphone information, including location data, may still be
only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call transmitted from your vehicle and you may still USA/CANADA
may be functioning if you have an operable have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
network. Use of any of the Uconnect Services including The radiated output power of the internal
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY consent to the collection, use and disclosure of frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
The Uconnect system collects and transmits this information in accordance with the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
data which may include information about your Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further
vehicle, your vehicle’s health and performance, information to be collected, used, or shared, from the human body.
your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the The internal wireless radio operates within
features in your vehicle, and other data. The
Uconnect Privacy Policy. guidelines found in radio frequency safety
collection, use and sharing of this information is
standards and recommendations, which reflect
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
services and is further described by the RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES the consensus of the scientific community.
Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/ being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
MULTIMEDIA 211
The radio manufacturer believes the internal NOTE:  If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The ference to radio or television reception,
 This equipment has been tested and found to which can be determined by turning the
level of energy emitted is far less than the
comply with the limits for a Class B digital equipment off and on, the user is encour-
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. aged to try to correct the interference by one
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
These limits are designed to provide reason- or more of the following measures:
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
able protection against harmful interference
situations or environments, such as aboard
in a residential installation. This equipment a. Increase the separation between the
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
generates, uses, and can radiate radio equipment and receiver.
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
frequency energy and, if not installed and
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 360. used in accordance with the instructions, b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
may cause harmful interference to radio rienced radio technician for help.
communications. However, there is no guar- 5
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
212
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates: WARNING! (Continued)
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
continue to hear for a short time after the diminish their effectiveness and may lead
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
stop) to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
and brake performance under most braking
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
conditions. The system automatically prevents Brake pedal pulsations
 brake pedal when you need to slow down or
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
stop.
braking.  A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
that the ABS is working properly each time the The ABS is designed to function with the it increase braking or steering efficiency
vehicle is started and driven. During this Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. beyond that afforded by the condition of the
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound Modification may result in degraded ABS vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
as well as some related motor noises. performance. afforded.
The ABS is activated during braking when the  The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
system detects one or more wheels are WARNING!
including those resulting from excessive
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic speed in turns, following another vehicle
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose equipment that may be susceptible to inter- too closely, or hydroplaning.
debris, or panic stops may increase the ference caused by improperly installed or
likelihood of ABS activation(s). high output radio transmitting equipment.  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
This interference can cause possible loss of must never be exploited in a reckless or
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of dangerous manner that could jeopardize
such equipment should be performed by the user’s safety or the safety of others.
qualified professionals.
(Continued)
SAFETY 213
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
WARNING!
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when control in various driving conditions. The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and Your vehicle may also be equipped with vent the natural laws of physics from acting
may stay on for as long as four seconds. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes cannot prevent collisions, including those
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC). resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
portion of the brake system is not functioning ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
and that service is required. However, the Brake Assist System (BAS) The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
conventional brake system will continue to must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on. gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
braking capability during emergency braking
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system maneuvers. The system detects an emergency user's safety or the safety of others.
should be serviced as soon as possible to braking situation by sensing the rate and
restore the benefits of Anti-lock Brakes. If the amount of brake application and then applies Brake System Warning Light 6
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have reduce braking distances. The BAS when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
the light repaired as soon as possible. complements the Anti-Lock Brake System mode and may stay on for as long as four
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) seconds.
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
SYSTEM benefit of the system, you must apply If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
continuous braking pressure during the comes on while driving, it indicates that the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). brake system is not functioning properly and
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless that immediate service is required. If the Brake
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake System Warning Light does not come on when
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
214 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

WARNING!
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability EBD manages the distribution of the braking
Control (ESC) and Electric Power Steering (EPS) torque between the front and rear axles by Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
modules that provides torque at the steering limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is conditions and driving conditions, influence
wheel for certain driving conditions in which the done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
torque that the steering wheel receives is only axle from entering ABS before the front axle. overs, especially those that involve leaving
meant to help the driver realize optimal steering the roadway or striking objects or other vehi-
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
stability. The only notification the driver receives ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
that the feature is active is the torque applied to monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the steering wheel. the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines the user's safety or the safety of others.
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
NOTE: angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
realize the correct course of action through ESC enhances directional control and stability
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
small torques on the steering wheel, which power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
important to realize that this feature will not due to other factors, such as road conditions,
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
responsible for steering the vehicle. vehicles.  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
 Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
SAFETY 215
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine

the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
When the actual path does not match the prevent the natural laws of physics from maintain your vehicle, may change the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase handling characteristics of your vehicle,
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the the traction afforded by prevailing road and may negatively affect the performance
oversteer or understeer condition. conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
including those resulting from excessive system, suspension, braking system, tire
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
speed in turns, driving on very slippery type and size or wheel size may adversely
located in the instrument cluster will start to
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot affect ESC performance. Improperly
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
prevent accidents resulting from loss of inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten- modification or poor vehicle maintenance
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
Indicator Light begins to flash during dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
system can increase the risk of loss of 6
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to less or dangerous manner which could injury and death.
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
road conditions. others.
(Continued)
216 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily

push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF WARNING! (Continued)
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC  Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
modes. on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting This mode is intended for off-highway or
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be off-road use when ESC stability features could
desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail
accomplished by momentarily pushing the ESC conditions. This mode is entered by pushing
OFF button to enter “Partial Off” mode. Once the and holding the ESC OFF button for five seconds
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is over- when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
come, turn ESC back on by momentarily running. After five seconds, the ESC OFF
pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done Indicator Light will illuminate and the “ESC OFF”
ESC OFF Button while the vehicle is in motion. message will appear in the instrument cluster
ESC On display.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. WARNING! In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system  When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func- “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
will be in this mode. This mode should be used tionality of ESC, except for the limited slip section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC feature described in the TCS section, has a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph
modes should only be used for specific reasons been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator (64 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off”
as noted in the following paragraphs. Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial mode, as described above. TCS remains off.
Partial Off Off” mode, the engine power reduction When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph
feature of TCS is disabled, and the (48 km/h), the ESC system shuts off. ESC is
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes enhanced vehicle stability offered by the deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC ESC system is reduced.
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
(Continued)
wheel spin than normally allowed.
SAFETY 217
not interfere with off-road driving. However, ESC ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
function returns to provide the stability feature And ESC OFF Indicator Light the customer has elected to have the
at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESC The ESC Activation/Malfunction Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
OFF Indicator Light will always be illuminated Indicator Light in the instrument reduced mode.
when ESC is off. cluster will come on when the ignition NOTE:
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the is placed in the ON mode. It should go  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
ESC OFF button. This will restore the “ESC On” out with the engine running. If the ESC Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
mode of operation. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on momentarily each time the ignition is
on continuously with the engine running, a placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/
system. If this light remains on after several
audible chime will sound when the gear selector RUN position, the ESC system will be on even
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
is placed into the PARK position from any other if it was turned off previously.
several miles (km) at speeds greater than
position, and then moved out of the PARK posi-
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
tion. This will occur even if the message was
soon as possible to have the problem

6
previously cleared. sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
diagnosed and corrected. sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light following the maneuver that caused the ESC
WARNING! activation.
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
reduction and stability features are disabled. Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) — If
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC Equipped
flashes when Traction Control System (TCS) is
system will not engage to assist in maintain- active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction ESS will activate the hazard lights at a faster
ing stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended for Indicator Light begins to flash during than normal speed when heavy brake pressure
off-highway or off-road use only. acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and is applied. ESS will only activate when the speed
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to is above 31 mph (50 km/h). The ESS operates
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing independently of other lamps, and will turn on
road conditions. and off automatically. This indicates to others
that the vehicle is stopping quickly.
218 SAFETY
NOTE: HDC has three states: Activating HDC

 A warning light will illuminate within the 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not Once HDC is enabled, it will activate
instrument cluster to inform the driver that activate). automatically if driven down a grade of
the ESS feature has been activated. sufficient magnitude (greater than
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
 When towing a trailer, ESS will also activate activation conditions are not met, or driver selectable by the driver and can be adjusted
the rear indicator lights of the trailer. is actively overriding with brake or throttle within the thresholds by using throttle or brake
application). application.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively Driver Override:
controlling vehicle speed).
The driver may override HDC activation speed
Enabling HDC with throttle or brake application at any time.
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but Deactivating HDC

the following conditions must also be met to HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
enable HDC: any of the following conditions occur:
 The driveline is in 4WD Low.  Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed
exceeding 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
 The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
 The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low  Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
speed off-road driving while in 4WD Low. HDC  The driver’s door is closed. magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
during various driving situations. HDC controls
 Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
SAFETY 219
Disabling HDC  The gear selection must match vehicle uphill

WARNING! direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
the following conditions occur:
controlling vehicle speed when descending REVERSE gear).
 The driver pushes the HDC switch. hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. driving conditions and is responsible for
 forward gears. The system will not activate if
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
 The driver’s door opens.
 The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph Hill Start Assist (HSA) WARNING!
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
There may be situations where the Hill Start
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
Feedback To The Driver: Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
HDC switch has an LED, which offer feedback to loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
the driver about the state HDC is in. is not a substitute for active driving involve- 6
throttle before this time expires, the system will
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi- release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
be attentive to distance to other vehicles,
nate and remain solid when HDC is enabled down the hill as normal.
people, and objects, and most importantly
or activated. This is the normal operating The following conditions must be met in order brake operation to ensure safe operation of
condition for HDC. for HSA to activate: the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
 The switch lamp will flash for several seconds  The feature must be enabled. complete attention is always required while
then extinguish when the driver pushes the driving to maintain safe control of your vehi-
HDC switch when enable conditions have not  The vehicle must be stopped. cle. Failure to follow these warnings can
been met. result in a collision or serious personal injury.
 The parking brake must be off.
The Hill Descent switch is located within the  The driver door must be closed.
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position.
 The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
220 SAFETY
Disabling And Enabling HSA Traction Control System (TCS)

WARNING! (Continued)
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for
change the current setting, proceed as follows:  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
the parking brake fully when exiting your detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
If disabling HSA using Uconnect settings see vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
Ú page 68. the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle
mission in PARK. power to provide enhanced acceleration and
Towing With HSA  Failure to follow these warnings can result stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide in a collision or serious personal injury. Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a
assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
trailer. Rain Brake Support (RBS) spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
WARNING! system will apply the brake of the spinning
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque to be
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your amount of brake pressure to remove any water
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in
and deactivated with the brake switch. If when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
reduced modes.
so, there may not be enough brake pres- speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer there is no notification to the driver and no Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
on a hill when the brake pedal is released. driver interaction is required. TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
In order to avoid rolling down an incline excessively swaying trailer and will take the
while resuming acceleration, manually acti- Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
TSC will become active automatically once an
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake braking during emergency braking situations. It
excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
pedal. anticipates when an emergency braking
(Continued) situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC) system will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
SAFETY 221
NOTE: trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. spot zones from the rear/front/side of the 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
Always use caution when towing a trailer and vehicle. driver of vehicles in these areas.
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
NOTE:
tions Ú page 128.
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
outside the detection zones.
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to  The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
Off” or “Full Off” modes. clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
Rear Detection Zones
WARNING! object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning 6
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside may result in the BSM warning light
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the remaining illuminated the entire time the
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer system is operational. The BSM system sensors vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be neces-
sway. operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear sary to deactivate the BSM system manually
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when to avoid misdetection Ú page 139.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS the vehicle is in PARK.
 The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
The BSM detection zone covers approximately experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F one lane width, 12 ft (3.8 m), on both sides of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
EQUIPPED the vehicle. The zone length starts at the when a motorcycle or any small object
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft remains at the side of the vehicle for
located inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the extended periods of time (more than a couple
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, vehicle. The BSM system monitors the of seconds).
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
222 SAFETY
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the detected object are present on the same side at
radar sensors are located must remain free of the same time, both the visual and audio alerts
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that will be issued. In addition to the audible alert
the BSM system can function properly. Do not the radio (if on) will also be muted.
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where
the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
Warning Light Location with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
The BSM system monitors the detection zone (48 km/h).
from three different entry points (side, rear,
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown) front) while driving to see if an alert is
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
appropriate side view mirror based on a during these types of zone entries.
detected object. If the turn signal is then Entering From The Side
activated, and it corresponds to an alert present
on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and from either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring
SAFETY 223
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing Opposing Traffic
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
WARNING!
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
occasionally the system may alert on such aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
6
objects. This is normal operation and your zones. The BSM system is not designed to
vehicle does not require service. detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
are traveling in the opposite direction of the system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 360. glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
Overtaking/Approaching signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
NOTE: can result in serious injury or death.
The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) in the side mirror LED icons Rear Cross Path (RCP)
while a motorcycle, or any small target, remains
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
at the vehicle’s B-pillar for an extended period
out of parking spaces where their vision of
of time (longer than a couple of seconds).
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
224 SAFETY
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The NOTE: Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
RCP system will then have a clear view of the In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
detected, alert the driver. the sensors are blocked by other structures or appropriate side view mirror based on a
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the detected object. However, when the system is
driver. operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
WARNING! audible alerts when a detected object is
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a present. Whenever an audible alert is
backup aid system. It is intended to be used requested, the radio is muted.
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be care-
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
ful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
RCP Detection Zones visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
look behind you, and be sure to check for
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
ure to do so can result in serious injury or
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
death.
objects moving a maximum of approximately signal and detected object are present on the
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot same side at the same time, both the visual and
situations. Blind Spot Modes audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
operation that are available in the Uconnect
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual NOTE:
system.
and audible alarms, including reducing the Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
radio volume. BSM system, the radio is also muted.
SAFETY 225
When the system is in RCP, the system shall the system by cycling the ignition from ON to the driver intends to avoid the collision by
respond with both visual and audible alerts OFF and then back ON. braking but has not applied sufficient brake
when a detected object is present. Whenever force, the system will compensate and provide
an audible alert is requested, the radio volume
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) additional brake force as required.
is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
ignored; the RCP state always requests the FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h),
chime. audible warnings, visual warnings (within the the system may provide the maximum braking
Blind Spot Alert Off instrument cluster display), and may apply a possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
potential frontal collision. The warnings and event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
limited braking are intended to provide the hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
BSM or RCP systems.
driver with enough time to react, avoid or then release the brakes.
NOTE: mitigate the potential collision.
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
NOTE: 6
FCW monitors the information from the forward
the vehicle is started the previously stored
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
mode will be recalled and used.
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
Blocked Sensor forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
If the system detects degraded performance
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
the warning indicators in side view mirrors will If the driver does not take action based upon FCW Message
be illuminated. The warning indicators will these progressive warnings, then the system
remain illuminated until blockage clearing will provide a limited level of active braking to
conditions are met. First clear the fascia/ help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
bumper area around the sensors of the forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
blockage. After removing the blockage, reset ings by braking and the system determines that
226 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
WARNING! the system, so no warning or autonomous
the warning message will be deactivated Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not braking will be available in case of a possible
Ú page 360. intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor collision.
can FCW detect every type of potential colli-
NOTE: NOTE:
sion. The driver has the responsibility to avoid
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is a collision by controlling the vehicle via brak-
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is
1 mph (2 km/h). ing and steering. Failure to follow this warning
turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is
could lead to serious injury or death.
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects restarted.
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction. FCW Settings Changing FCW Sensitivity and Operating
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW The Forward Collision menu setting is located in Status
activation and functionality. the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139. The FCW Sensitivity and Operation settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
 It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To NOTE:
Ú page 139.
prevent such misuse of the system, after four The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the allows the system to provide warning and auton- The default status of FCW is the “Medium”
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti- omous braking in the event of a potential frontal setting and the FCW is in the “Full On” setting.
vated until the next key cycle. collision. This allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use Changing the FCW status to “Warning Only” audible/visual warnings and it applies
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW prevents the system from providing autonomous braking.
system should be deactivated to prevent autonomous braking, or additional brake
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. support if the driver is not braking adequately in Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
the event of a potential frontal collision. allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings when the latter is at a
farther distance than in the "Medium" setting.
SAFETY 227
This provides the most reaction time to avoid a momentarily, there may be a condition that defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
possible collision. limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is has not been driven for at least three hours, or
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting still driveable under normal conditions, the driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
allows the system to warn the driver of a active braking may not be fully available. Once hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
possible collision with the vehicle in front when the condition that limited the system must not exceed the maximum inflation
the vehicle in the front is much closer. This performance is no longer present, the system pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
setting provides less reaction time than the will return to its full performance state. If the pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a problem persists, see an authorized dealer. driven. This is normal and there should be no
more dynamic driving experience. adjustment for this increased pressure.
Service FCW Warning
For more information on how to properly inflate
NOTE: If the system turns off, and the instrument
the vehicle’s tires, see Ú page 330.
cluster display reads “FCW Unavailable Service
 The system will retain the last setting Required”, there is an internal system fault. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
selected by the driver after ignition shut Although the vehicle is still driveable under pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
down. normal conditions, have the system checked by low-pressure warning limit for any reason, 6
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such an authorized dealer. including low temperature effects and natural
as overhead objects, ground reflections, pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away, (TPMS) as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire off until the tire pressure is at or above the
same or higher rate of speed. pressure based on the vehicle recommended recommended cold placard pressure.
 If FCW is disabled, unavailable screens will cold placard pressure. NOTE:

be displayed. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pres-
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F sure Monitoring System Warning Light) illumi-
FCW Limited Warning (6.5°C). This means that when the outside nates, you must increase the tire pressure to
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW temperature decreases, the tire pressure will the recommended cold placard pressure in
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited decrease. Tire pressure should always be set order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is Warning Light to turn off.
228 SAFETY
The system will automatically update and the (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni- CAUTION! (Continued)
will turn off once the system receives the toring System Warning Light off.  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph CAUTION! This will prevent moisture and dirt from
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this entering the valve stem, which could
 The TPMS has been optimized for the orig- damage the TPMS sensor.
information.
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
For example, your vehicle may have a pressures and warning have been estab- NOTE:
recommended cold (parked for more than three lished for the tire size equipped on your
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If vehicle. Undesirable system operation or  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and sensor damage may result when using tire care and maintenance, or to provide
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), replacement equipment that is not of the warning of a tire failure or condition.
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
decrease the tire pressure to approximately sensor is not designed for use on after- sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low market wheels and may contribute to a
enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring poor overall system performance or sensor  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may damage. Customers are encouraged to use causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure operation. efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on. the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring the Tire Pressure Monitoring System  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
System Warning Light will turn off only after the (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended using an aftermarket tire sealant it is bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
cold placard pressure value Ú page 360. recommended that you take your vehicle to an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
an authorized dealer to have your sensor underinflation has not reached the level to
NOTE:
function checked.
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (Continued)
SAFETY 229
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-  Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning (those highlighted or in a different color in the
toring System Warning Light. Light instrument cluster display graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure value, as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the Warnings Once the system receives the updated tire
actual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressures, the system will automatically
Premium System Warning Light will illuminate in the update, the pressure values in the graphic
instrument cluster and a chime will display in the instrument cluster will stop being
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sound when tire pressure is low in one highlighted or return to their original color, and
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" Light will turn off.
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
message, an “Inflate to XX” message, and a
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire NOTE:
graphic showing the pressure values of each
pressure readings to the receiver module. When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
NOTE: or in a different color. 6
It is particularly important for you to check the (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. toring System Warning Light off.
The TPMS consists of the following The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
components: 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
 Receiver Module
Service TPMS Warning
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
 Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
messages, which will display in the instru- Should this occur, you should stop as soon as on solid. The system fault will also sound a
ment cluster display. possible and inflate the tires with low pressure chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
230 SAFETY
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching and then display dashes (--) in place of the
a minimum of five seconds and then display Full Size Spare pressure value.
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
indicate which sensor is not being received.
full size does not have a Tire Pressure chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the Monitoring System Warning Light will flash
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire compact or non-matching full size spare on solid, and the instrument cluster will
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will tire. display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM for five seconds and then display dashes (--)
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a 2. If you install the compact or non-matching
in place of the pressure value.
pressure value will display in place of the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of has a pressure below the low-pressure 5. Once you repair or replace the original road
the following: warning limit, upon the next ignition key tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System the compact spare or non-matching full
 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving Warning Light will remain on and a chime size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
next to facilities emitting the same radio will sound. In addition, the graphic in the addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
instrument cluster will still display a System Warning Light will turn off and the
 Installing some form of aftermarket window different color or highlighted pressure value graphic in the instrument cluster will display
tinting that affects radio wave signals and the “Inflate to XX” message. a new pressure value instead of dashes (--),
as long as no tire pressure is below the
 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or 3. After driving the vehicle for up to
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
wheel housings 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
active road tires. The vehicle may need to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
 Using tire chains on the vehicle be driven for up to 20 minutes above
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS and then remain on solid. In addition, the
receive this information.
sensors instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
SAFETY 231
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off. The instrument cluster will display the Please pay close attention to the information in
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display pressure values in place of the dashes. system properly, to keep you and your
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter passengers as safe as possible.
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed Here are some simple steps you can take to
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four as long as no system fault exists. minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires bag:
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle 1. Children 12 years old and under should
Some of the most important safety features in always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
your vehicle are the restraint systems: vehicle with a rear seat.
TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
75 seconds and then remain on. The FEATURES 6
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
 Seat Belt Systems in the appropriate child restraint or
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
 seating position Ú page 255.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Bags
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
 Child Restraints rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the Some of the safety features described in this front passenger seat, move the seat as far
pressure values. section may be standard equipment on some back as possible and use the proper child
models, or may be optional equipment on restraint Ú page 255.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the dealer.
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire
232 SAFETY
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
belt behind them or under their arm.
WARNING! vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in belted at all times.
5. You should read the instructions provided
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
with your child restraint to make sure that front air bag can cause death or serious Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
you are using it properly. injury to a child 12 years or younger, (BeltAlert)
6. All occupants should always wear their lap including a child in a rear-facing child Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
and shoulder belts properly. restraint.
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a equipped with outboard front passenger seat
be moved back as far as practical to allow
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
the front air bags room to inflate.
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If not transport a rear-facing child restraint in switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
your vehicle has side air bags, and that vehicle.
deployment occurs, the side air bags will Initial Indication
inflate forcefully into the space between SEAT BELT S YSTEMS If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
occupants and the door and occupants switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
could be injured. Buckle up even though you are an excellent a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to may be a poor driver and could cause a collision equipped with outboard front passenger seat
be modified to accommodate a disabled that includes you. This can happen far away BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
person, see Ú page 357 for customer from home or on your own street. is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
service contact information.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries remain on until both outboard front seat belts
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the passenger seat is unoccupied.
SAFETY 233
BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated not active when the outboard front passenger to move freely with you under normal
when the vehicle is moving above a specified seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard when an animal or other items are placed on will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped the outboard front passenger seat or when the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is vehicle.
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is recommended that pets be restrained in the
not active when the outboard front passenger rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet WARNING!
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning carriers that are secured by seat belts, and  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt cargo is properly stowed. more severe injuries in a collision. The air
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not properly. In some collisions, the air bags
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light recommend deactivating BeltAlert. won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. belt even though you have air bags.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
NOTE: 6
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver  In a collision, you and your passengers can
based on vehicle speed until the driver and suffer much greater injuries if you are not
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
occupants to buckle their seat belts. you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
turn on and remain on until the driver and
Change of Status be sure you and others in your vehicle are
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled up properly.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if buckled.
equipped with outboard front passenger seat  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Lap/Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning All seating positions in your vehicle are people riding in these areas are more likely
sequence will begin until the seat belts are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. to be seriously injured or killed.
buckled again. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only (Continued)
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
234 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

 Do not allow people to ride in any area of  A lap belt worn too high can increase the  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt dangerous. Your body could strike the
and seat belts. forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
bones, but across your abdomen. Always increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
possible and keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is  A twisted seat belt may not protect you bones. Wear the seat belt over your
also provided at their seating position to properly. In a collision, it could even cut into shoulder so that your strongest bones will
minimize the risk of severe injury or death you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against take the force in a collision.
in the event of a crash. your body, without twists. If you can’t  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it protect you from injury during a collision.
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
to an authorized dealer immediately and You are more likely to hit your head in a
make your injuries in a collision much
have it fixed. collision if you do not wear your shoulder
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
Follow these instructions to wear your seat buckle will not protect you properly. The lap be used together.
belt safely and to keep your passengers portion could ride too high on your body,  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
safe, too. possibly causing internal injuries. Always a collision and leave you with no protection.
buckle your seat belt into the buckle Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
 Two people should never be belted into a
nearest you. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
one another badly. Never use a lap/ you properly. In a sudden stop, you could ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one move too far forward, increasing the possi- seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
person, no matter what their size. bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. must be replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
SAFETY 235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
seat belt to go around your lap.
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and 5. Position the shoulder belt across the
lies low across your hips, below your shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt slack so that it is comfortable and not
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To resting on your neck. The retractor will 6
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
the seat belt in a collision.
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
Pulling Out The Latch Plate fully.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click”.
236 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
lap/shoulder belt. until it is locked into position.
1. Position the latch plate as close as WARNING!

possible to the anchor point.
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above make your injuries in a collision much
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that you could even slide out of the seat belt.
begins immediately above the latch plate. Adjustable Anchorage Follow these instructions to wear your seat
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you belt safely and to keep your passengers
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a safe, too.
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
lower position, and if you are taller than  Position the shoulder belt across the
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it anchorage in a higher position. After you slack so that it is comfortable and not
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt release the anchorage button, try to move it up resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
is no longer twisted. or down to make sure that it is locked in draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
position.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage  Misadjustment of the seat belt could
NOTE: reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
In the driver and outboard front passenger
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage in a crash.
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This  Always make all seat belt height adjust-
adjusted upward or downward to position the
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to ments when the vehicle is stationary.
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
be adjusted in the upward position without
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
SAFETY 237
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating

Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The
mini-latch plate and buckle (if equipped) should
remain connected at all times. If the mini-latch
plate and buckle become disconnected, they
must be properly reconnected prior to the rear
center seat belt being used by an occupant.
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
1. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat. 3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate 5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow lies low across your hips, below your
the seat belt to go around your lap. abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To 6
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
you hear a “click.”
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button
insert the mini-latch plate into the
on the buckle.
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

238 SAFETY
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
mini-buckle, insert the regular latch plate If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING! Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi- Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the the event of an accident is reduced for the
WARNING!
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
 If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are distance between the front edge of the a seat belt.
not properly connected when the seat belt Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of Position the lap belt snug and low below the
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. abdomen and across the strong bones of the
not be able to provide proper restraint and
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
needed can increase the risk of serious and away from the neck. Never place the
 When reattaching the mini-latch plate and injury or death in a collision. Only use the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, Seat Belt Pretensioner
long enough and only use in the recom-
follow the preceding procedure to detach mended seating positions. Remove and The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, store the Seat Belt Extender when not with pretensioning devices that are designed to
untwist the webbing, and reattach the needed. remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. a collision. These devices may improve the
SAFETY 239
performance of the seat belt by removing slack Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
from the seat belt early in a collision. used to secure a child restraint system into the buckle until you hear a "click."
Pretensioners work for all size occupants, Ú page 264. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
including those in child restraints. The figure below illustrates the locking feature automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
NOTE: for each seating position. retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
These devices are not a substitute for proper Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat child restraint is installed in a seating position
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
properly. 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
The pretensioners are triggered by the with a rear seat.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. WARNING!
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in 6
Energy Management Feature Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) front air bag can cause death or serious
Locations injury to a child 12 years or younger,
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
If the passenger seating position is equipped including a child in a rear-facing child
with an Energy Management feature that may
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, restraint.
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
of a collision. The seat belt system has a  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
retractor assembly that is designed to release the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
webbing in a controlled manner. rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
(ALR) retract completely in this case and then that vehicle.
The seat belts in the passenger seating carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
positions are equipped with a Switchable necessary to comfortably wrap around the
240 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode Air Bag System Components
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
belt.
could increase the risk of injury in colli-  Air Bag Warning Light
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull sions.
 Steering Wheel and Column
downward until the entire seat belt is  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
extracted. restrain occupants who are wearing the  Instrument Panel
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat seat belt or children who are using booster  Knee Impact Bolsters
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
restraints that have a harness for
Automatic Locking Mode.  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
restraining the child.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode  Supplemental Side Air Bags
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS  Supplemental Knee Air Bags
and allow it to retract completely to disengage (SRS)
 Front and Side Impact Sensors
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the Some of the safety features described in this
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. section may be standard equipment on some  Seat Belt Pretensioners
models, or may be optional equipment on  Seat Track Position Sensors
WARNING! others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if dealer.  Occupant Classification System
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor The air bag system must be ready to protect you
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
is not working properly when checked
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
according to the procedures in the Service
interconnecting wiring associated with the
Manual.
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
(Continued) vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
SAFETY 241
Air Bag Warning Light record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
WARNING!
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the free, if any of the following occurs, have an Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
electronic parts of the air bag system authorized dealer service the air bag system instrument panel could mean you won’t have
whenever the ignition switch is in the immediately. the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on If the light does not come on as a bulb check
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the during the four to eight seconds when the when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
inflate. you drive, have an authorized dealer service
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the air bag system immediately.
The ORC contains a backup power supply the four to eight-second interval.
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
disconnected prior to deployment. tently or remains on while driving. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in NOTE: 6
the Supplemental Restraint System
the instrument panel for approximately four to If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
chime will sound to alert you that the
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning authorized dealer service the air bag system
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A immediately.
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
comes on again after initial startup.
remains on while driving have an authorized
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will dealer service the vehicle immediately
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Ú page 74.
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
242 SAFETY
Front Air Bags severity and type of collision as determined by

WARNING! the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.  Being too close to the steering wheel or may receive information from the front impact
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat instrument panel during front air bag sensors (if equipped) or other system
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is deployment could cause serious injury, components.
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. including death. Air bags need room to
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
during an impact that requires air bag
instrument panel, above the glove your arms to reach the steering wheel or
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
instrument panel.
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
front air bag can cause death or serious
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child detects whether the driver or front passenger
restraint. seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in Front Air Bags.
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do front passenger seat track position sensors that
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations that vehicle. Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with a right front
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag passenger Occupant Classification System
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Features (“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger
Driver Knee Air Bag Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
determined by the OCS.
This system provides output appropriate to the
SAFETY 243
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
WARNING! collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
 No objects should be placed over or near frontal collisions, including some that may eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
the air bag on the instrument panel or produce substantial vehicle damage — for while helping to restrain the driver and front
steering wheel because any such objects example, some pole collisions, truck passenger.
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli- underrides, and angle offset collisions.
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
On the other hand, depending on the type and Front Passenger Seat
inflate.
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
Do not put anything on or around the air The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
 crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
bag covers or attempt to open them manu- part of a Federally regulated safety system for
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
ally. You may damage the air bags and you this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
could be injured because the air bags may
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are damage by themselves are not good indicators the OCS.
designed to open only when the air bags of whether or not an air bag should have
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) 6
are inflating. deployed.
consists of the following:
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
more severe injuries in a collision. The air all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you you in position, away from an inflating air bag.  Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Sensor located in the front passenger seat
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
even though you have air bags.  Air Bag Warning Light
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Front Air Bag Operation bags. Sensor
Front Air Bags are designed to provide The steering wheel hub trim cover and the The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
additional protection by supplementing the seat upper passenger side of the instrument panel located underneath the front passenger seat.
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce separate and fold out of the way as the air bags The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
244 SAFETY
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will important for the front passenger to be seated  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input properly and properly wearing the seat belt. small passenger, including a child; or
from the Sensor to determine the front The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
passenger’s most probable classification. The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS rear-facing child restraint; or
OCM communicates this information to the may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates  The front passenger is not properly seated or
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag that: his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
deployment based on occupant classification. period of time.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is  The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
 Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
SAFETY 245
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
probable classification. The OCS estimates the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
seated weight on the front passenger seat and This does not mean that the OCS is working
where that weight is located. The OCS improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
communicates the classification status to the seated weight on the front passenger seat may
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to result in a reduced-power deployment of the
determine whether the Passenger Advanced Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted. the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is passenger seat may result in a full-power
important for the front passenger to be seated Seated Properly deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Air Bag.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Properly seated passengers are: Adults) Examples of improper front passenger seating
Sitting upright include:
 When a lighter weight passenger, including a
 Facing forward
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,  The front passenger’s weight is transferred to 6
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
 Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does rest or instrument panel).
comfortably on or near the floor not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
 The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
 Sitting with their back against the seatback Do not decrease OR increase the front or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
and the seatback in an upright position passenger’s seated weight on the front
 The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
passenger seat
full upright position.
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.  The front passenger carries or holds an
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
death. The OCS determines the most probable etc.).
classification of the occupant that it detects.  Objects are lodged under the front passenger
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s seat.
decreased or increased seated weight, which
246 SAFETY
 Objects are lodged between the front

passenger seat and center console.
 Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
 Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
WARNING!
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s  If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
properly seated weight input, for example: ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
Not Seated Properly
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
Not Seated Properly the floor.
(Continued)
SAFETY 247
The passenger seat assembly contains critical  At no time should any Supplemental
WARNING! (Continued) OCS components that may affect the Passenger Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the related component or fastener be modified
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a or replaced with any part except those which
passenger seat. Holding an object may front seat passenger, the OCS components are approved by FCA US LLC.
provide an output signal to the OCS that is must function as designed. Do not make any
different than the occupant’s properly modifications to the front passenger seat WARNING!
seated weight input, which may result in components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
 Unapproved modifications or service proce-
serious injury or death in a collision. the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
Placing an object on the floor under the for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
 related components, seat cover or cushion
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat may inadvertently change the air bag
from working properly, which may result in accessories may be used. deployment in case of a frontal collision.
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not The following requirements must be strictly This could result in death or serious injury
place any objects on the floor under the followed: to the front passenger if the vehicle is
front passenger seat. involved in a collision. A modified vehicle 6
 Do not modify the front passenger seat
may not comply with required Federal
assembly or components in any way.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to  Do not use prior or future model year seat and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
classify the front passenger seat status. A covers or cushions not designated by FCA US Standards (CMVSS).
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation LLC for the specific model being repaired.  If it is necessary to modify the air bag
of the air bag system. Always use the correct seat cover and system for persons with disabilities,
cushion specified for the vehicle. contact an authorized dealer.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it  Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
authorized dealer for service immediately.  Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
248 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
knees of the driver and front passenger, and (SABs) The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
position the front occupants for improved seam into the space between the occupant and
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
interaction with the front air bags. Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). and with such a high force that it could injure
WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the items are positioned in the area where the SAB
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
impact bolsters in any way. AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat injury from a deploying air bag.
 Do not mount any accessories to the knee trim on the outboard side of the seats.
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, WARNING!
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Do not use accessory seat covers or place
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provided by the seat belts and body structure. the performance could be adversely affected
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental and/or objects could be pushed into you,
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument causing serious injury.
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by (SABICs)
working together with the seat belts,
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SAFETY 249
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial severity and type of collision. The side impact
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants sensors aid the ORC in determining the
through side windows in certain side impact appropriate response to impact events. The
events. system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
WARNING! that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
or other cargo up high enough to block the independently; a left side impact deploys the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) covering above the side windows where the deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
Label Location SABIC and its deployment path are located damage by itself is not a good indicator of
should remain free from any obstructions. whether or not Side Air Bags should have
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
deployed.
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard  In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to do not install any accessory items in your The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain 6
the injury reduction potential provided by the vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
seat belts and body structure. add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. angles, or some side collisions that do not
Do not add roof racks that require perma- impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. deploy.
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
and seated properly, or if items are positioned Side Impacts restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in time than it takes to blink your eyes.
are at an even greater risk of injury from a certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
deploying air bag. Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
250 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
 Occupants, including children, who are up  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during sensing system determines if a rollover event
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be deployment could cause you to be severely may be in progress and whether deployment is
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, injured or killed. appropriate. In the event the vehicle
including children, should never lean on or experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
sleep against the door, side windows, or and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
area where the side air bags inflate, even if sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
they are in an infant or child restraint. seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
 Seat belts (and child restraints where Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always vehicle.
appropriate) are necessary for your protec- wear your seat belt even though you have The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
tion in all collisions. They also help keep Side Air Bags. or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
you in position, away from an inflating Side through side windows in certain rollover or side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the NOTE: impact events.
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
seat belts properly and sit upright with their trim, but they will open during air bag deploy- Air Bag System Components
backs against the seats. Children must be ment. NOTE:
properly restrained in a child restraint or
Rollover Events The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child. tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
designed to activate in certain rollover events. Components listed below:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
WARNING! Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular 
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not rollover event is appropriate, based on the
lean against the door or window. Sit upright  Air Bag Warning Light
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
in the center of the seat. itself is not a good indicator of whether or not  Steering Wheel and Column
(Continued) Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.  Instrument Panel
SAFETY 251
 Knee Impact Bolsters  The air bag material may sometimes cause Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- deployed. If you are involved in another
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The collision, the air bags will not be in place to
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or protect you.
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
 Supplemental Side Air Bags gymnasium floor. They are not caused by WARNING!
 Supplemental Knee Air Bags contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
Front and Side Impact Sensors ers cannot protect you in another collision.
 you haven’t healed significantly within a few
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
 Seat Belt Pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies
doctor immediately.
replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
 Seat Track Position Sensors
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
 Occupant Classification System smoke-like particles. The particles are a troller System serviced as well.
normal by-product of the process that gener-
If A Deployment Occurs ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla- 6
NOTE:
The front air bags are designed to deflate tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
immediately after deployment. skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. rior trim, but they will open during air bag
NOTE: For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. deployment.
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
collisions. This does not mean something is  After any collision, the vehicle should be
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
wrong with the air bag system. taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
If you do have a collision which deploys the air cleaning.
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
252 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System  Cut off battery power to the: you have any doubt, contact an authorized
In the event of an impact, if the communication dealer.
 Engine
network remains intact, and the power remains Enhanced Accident Response System
intact, depending on the nature of the event,  Electric Motor (if equipped)
Reset Procedure
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will  Electric power steering
determine whether to have the Enhanced After the event occurs, when the system is
Accident Response System perform the  Brake booster active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is
following functions: displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition
 Electric park brake
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)  Automatic transmission gear selector STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
 Horn
equipped) the ground near the engine compartment and
 Front wiper fuel tank before resetting the system and
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has starting the engine.
power  Headlamp washer pump
Depending on the nature of the event the left
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on NOTE: and right turn signal lights, located in the
as long as the battery has power or for After an accident, remember to cycle the igni- instrument panel, may both be blinking and will
15 minutes from the intervention of the tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle
Enhanced Accident Response System remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid to the side of the road, you must follow the
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle system reset procedure.
 Unlock the power door locks for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform the ground near the engine compartment and
any of these other functions in response to the fuel tank before resetting the system and
Enhanced Accident Response System: starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the headlights) after an accident, reset the system
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula- by following the procedure described below. If
tion Door
SAFETY 253
Customer Action
NOTE: Customer Will See
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light BLINKS.
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Right turn light is OFF.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. 6
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is OFF.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
254 SAFETY
Customer Action
NOTE: Customer Will See
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Right turn light is OFF.
Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be com-
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
pleted within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within Maintaining Your Air Bag System
60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink WARNING! (Continued)
and the reset procedure must be performed WARNING!  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
again in order to be successful.  Modifications to any part of the air bag the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
system could cause it to fail when you need anyone who works on your vehicle that it
it. You could be injured if the air bag system has an air bag system.
is not there to protect you. Do not modify (Continued)
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
(Continued)
SAFETY 255
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds To read data recorded by an EDR, special
WARNING! (Continued) or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to equipment is required, and access to the
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your record such data as: vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-  How various systems in your vehicle were vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
dentally or may not function properly if operating; law enforcement, that have the special
modifications are made. Take your vehicle equipment, can read the information if they
to an authorized dealer for any air bag  Whether or not the driver and passenger have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
system service. If your seat, including your safety belts were buckled/fastened;
trim cover and cushion, needs to be CHILD R ESTRAINTS
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
serviced in any way (including removal or Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
loosening/tightening of seat attachment at all times, including babies and children. Every
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized  How fast the vehicle was traveling. state in the United States, and every Canadian
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat province, requires that small children ride in
accessories may be used. If it is necessary These data can help provide a better
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
understanding of the circumstances in which
to modify the air bag system for persons you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. 6
with disabilities, contact an authorized crashes and injuries occur.
dealer. Children 12 years or younger should ride
NOTE: properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a According to crash statistics, children are safer
Event Data Recorder (EDR) non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are when properly restrained in the rear seats
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorded by the EDR under normal driving rather than in the front.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
situations, such as an air bag deployment or However, other parties, such as law enforce-
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
understanding how a vehicle’s systems of personally identifying data routinely acquired
performed. The EDR is designed to record data during a crash investigation.
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
256 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
WARNING! for children from newborn size to the child where you will use it.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
NOTE:
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
force required to hold even an infant on your make sure you have the correct seat for your  For additional information, refer to http://
lap could become so great that you could not child. Carefully read and follow all the www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
hold the child, no matter how strong you are. instructions and warnings in the child restraint call: 1–888–327–4236
The child and others could be badly injured or Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should to the child restraint.  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Canada’s website for additional information:
Before buying any restraint system, make sure https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
that it has a label certifying that it meets all child-car-seat-safety.html
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Har-
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-fac-
ness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
ing child restraint
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat
SAFETY 257
Infant And Child Restraints Children should remain in a forward-facing child

WARNING! seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in to the highest weight or height allowed by the
old or until they reach either the height or front of an air bag. A deploying passenger child seat.
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. front air bag can cause death or serious
All children whose weight or height is above the
Two types of child restraints can be used injury to a child 12 years or younger,
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child including a child in a rear-facing child
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
seats. restraint.
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a seat cushion while the child’s back is against
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
that vehicle. belt.
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a 6
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING!
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their Children who are two years old or who have  Improper installation can lead to failure of
infant carrier but are still less than at least two outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat an infant or child restraint. It could come
years old. Children should remain rear-facing can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. loose in a collision. The child could be badly
until they reach the highest weight or height Forward-facing child seats and convertible child injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
allowed by their convertible child seat. seats used in the forward-facing direction are manufacturer’s directions exactly when
for children who are over two years old or who installing an infant or child restraint.
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height (Continued)
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
258 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats If the answer to any of these questions was
WARNING! (Continued) “no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
Children who are large enough to wear the
 After a child restraint is installed in the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat long enough to bend over the front of the seat shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
forward or rearward because it can loosen when their back is against the seatback, should and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
the child restraint attachments. Remove use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
the child restraint before adjusting the 5-step test to decide whether the child can use belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat the vehicle’s seat belt alone: the face or neck, move the child closer to the
has been adjusted, reinstall the child center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
restraint. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against position the seat belt on the child correctly.
the back of the vehicle seat?
 When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or WARNING!
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the the front of the vehicle seat – while the child Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. is still sitting all the way back? under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the shoulder belt will not protect a child prop-
the occupants or seatbacks and cause 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s erly, which may result in serious injury or
serious personal injury. shoulder between the neck and arm? death. A child must always wear both the lap
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, and shoulder portions of the seat belt cor-
touching the child’s thighs and not the rectly.
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
SAFETY 259
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Combined Weight of
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower
LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Tether
Anchors Only Anchor
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
Restraint (29.5 kg)
X 6
260 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands Restraints In This Vehicle
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
LATCH Label
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these LATCH Positions
seating positions, the seat belt must be used Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
with the top tether anchorage to install the child Seating Position)
restraint. Please see the following table for Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
more information.
SAFETY 261
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight bined weight of the child and the child restraint
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchorage system to attach the child restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be or forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or for- No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
ward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat man-
ufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s man-
ual for more information.
6
You can install child restraints with flexible lower
Can a child seat be installed in the center posi- anchors in the center position. The inner
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Yes anchorages are 16 inches (400 mm) apart. Do
from the outboard seating positions? not install child restraints with rigid lower
anchors in the center position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
Can two child restraints be attached using a not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
No
common lower LATCH anchorage? use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
262 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
Yes
back of the front passenger seat? turer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
The lower anchorages are round bars There are tether strap anchorages be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
that are found at the rear of the seat behind each rear seating position on each side. Each will have a hook or
cushion where it meets the seatback, located on the back of the seat. connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
below the anchorage symbols on the a way to tighten the connection to the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will some rear-facing child restraints will also be
easily feel them if you run your finger along the equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
gap between the seatback and seat cushion. will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
Tether Anchorage Locations
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Lower Anchorage Location
SAFETY 263
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps according to the child restraint
WARNING! and on the tether strap of the child seat so manufacturer’s instructions.
Never use the same lower anchorage to that you can more easily attach the hooks
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
attach more than one child restraint. If you or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
are installing LATCH-compatible child
2. Place the child seat between the lower seat at the belt path. It should not move
restraints next to each other, you must use
anchorages for that seating position. If the more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
the seat belt for the center position. You can
second row seat can be reclined, you may direction.
then use either the LATCH anchors or the
recline the seat and/or raise the head
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the outboard positions.
the rear seat can be moved forward and (ALR) Seat Belt:
Please see Ú page 263 for typical installa- rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to When using the LATCH attaching system to
tion instructions. move it to its rear-most position to make install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
room for the child seat. You may also move that are not being used by other occupants or
Always follow the directions of the child the front seat forward to allow more room being used to secure child restraints. An unused 6
restraint manufacturer when installing your for the child seat. belt could injure a child if they play with it and
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
will be installed as described here. installing a child restraint using the LATCH
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child the selected seating position.
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
Restraint 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, buckled seat belt interferes with the child
If the selected seating position has a connect it to the top tether anchorage. See restraint installation, instead of buckling it
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Ú page 266 for directions to attach a tether behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the anchor. through the child restraint belt path and then
instructions below. See Ú page 264 to check buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
what type of seat belt each seating position has. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
child restraint rearward and downward into
toys and that they should not play with them.
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
264 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle
 Improper installation of a child restraint to  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of directions exactly when installing an infant
the restraint. The child could be badly or child restraint.
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when The seat belts in the passenger seating
installing an infant or child restraint. positions are equipped with a Switchable
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
withstand only those loads imposed by designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no tight around the child restraint so that it is not
circumstances are they to be used for adult necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
items or equipment to the vehicle. by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Installing Child Restraints Using The the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
Vehicle Seat Belt clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. Ú page 239 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
WARNING! sections for more information.
 Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
(Continued)
SAFETY 265
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight Always use the tether anchor when using the
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor seat belt to install a forward facing child
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
child restraint? the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child
back of the front passenger seat?
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-
seat belt against the belt path of the child No
tion with an ALR retractor.
restraint?
6
Installing A Child Restraint With A child seat. You may also move the front
WARNING! (Continued) seat forward to allow more room for the
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s child seat.
directions exactly when installing an infant
Child restraint systems are designed to be 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
or child restraint.
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap the retractor to pass it through the belt path
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
seating position. If the second row seat can webbing in the belt path.
WARNING! be reclined, you may recline the seat and/ 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
 Improper installation or failure to properly or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to hear a “click.”
secure a child restraint can lead to failure get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
of the restraint. The child could be badly moved forward and rearward in the 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
injured or killed. vehicle, you may wish to move it to its tight against the child seat.
(Continued) rear-most position to make room for the
266 SAFETY
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so 1. Look behind the seating position where
shoulder part of the belt until you have check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if you plan to install the child restraint to find
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the necessary. the tether anchorage. You may need to
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract move the seat forward to provide better
back into the retractor. As the webbing Installing Child Restraints Using The Top access to the tether anchorage. If there is
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This Tether Anchorage: no top tether anchorage for that seating
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic position, move the child restraint to
WARNING!
Locking mode. another position in the vehicle if one is
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing available.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
car seat to any location in front of the car
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
out any webbing. If the retractor is not direct path for the strap between the anchor
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
locked, repeat step 5. and the child seat. If your vehicle is
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to that is approved for that seating position, equipped with adjustable rear head
tighten the lap portion around the child located behind the top of the vehicle seat. restraints, raise the head restraint, and
restraint while you push the child restraint See Ú page 260 for the location of approved where possible, route the tether strap under
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. tether anchorages in your vehicle. the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
restraint and pass the tether strap around
and the seating position has a top tether
the outboard side of the head restraint.
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
Ú page 266 for directions to attach a tether restraint to the top tether anchorage as
anchor. shown in the diagram.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
SAFETY 267
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according

to the child restraint manufacturer’s
SAFETY TIPS Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
instructions. TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS are secured by seat belts.
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE
CARGO AREA. I NSIDE THE VEHICLE
WARNING! Seat Belts
 Do not leave children or animals inside Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
build-up may cause serious injury or death. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
Rear Seat Tether Anchors collision, people riding in these areas are after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
more likely to be seriously injured or killed. be replaced after a collision if they have been 6
WARNING! damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of
 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
lead to increased head motion and or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
and seat belts.
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Air Bag Warning Light
seat to secure a child restraint top tether and using a seat belt properly. The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
strap. to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
 If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear TRANSPORTING P ETS ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
seat, make sure the tether strap does not position. If the light is either not on during
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
slip into the opening between the seat- starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
backs as you remove slack in the strap. the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
about and possibly injured, or injure a
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
268 SAFETY
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It

will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driving, have an authorized dealer service the stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fas- driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
vehicle immediately Ú page 231. teners may cause your floor mat to interfere ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
Defroster and cause a loss of vehicle control. To pre- erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode vent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: present) to check for interference. If your
and place the blower control on high speed. You floor mat interferes with the operation of
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
should be able to feel the air directed against any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
install your floor mat upside down or turn
service if your defroster is inoperable. place the floor mat in your trunk.
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
Floor Mat Safety Information mat is secured using the floor mat  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
fasteners on a regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area.
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
interfere with the operation of the accelerator, MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before slide into the driver’s side floor area when
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that installing any other floor mat. NEVER install the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
is securely attached using the floor mat or stack an additional floor mat on top of an trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that  NEVER place any objects under the floor
in other ways. cannot be properly attached and secured to mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be could change the position of the floor mat
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor and may cause interference with the accel-
mat for the specific make, model, and year erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
of your vehicle. (Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY 269
Lights
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
Have someone observe the operation of brake
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and lights and exterior lights while you work the  If you are required to drive with the trunk/
re-installed, always properly attach carpet controls. Check turn signal and high beam liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
to the floor and check the floor mat indicator lights on the instrument panel. windows are closed and the climate control
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter- Door Latches NOT use the recirculation mode.
ference with the accelerator, brake, or Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.  If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
Fluid Leaks with the engine running, adjust your heating
 It is recommended to only use mild soap Check area under the vehicle after overnight or cooling controls to force outside air into
and water to clean your floor mats. After parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
cleaning, always check your floor mat has Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
been properly installed and is secured to The best protection against carbon monoxide
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners entry into the vehicle body is a properly
should be located and corrected immediately. 6
by lightly pulling mat. maintained engine exhaust system.
EXHAUST GAS Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
WARNING! be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
Tires carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon- exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, scious and can eventually poison you. To broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. connections could permit exhaust fumes to
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or seep into the passenger compartment. In
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. in confined areas any longer than needed
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
(Continued) change. Replace as required.
inflation pressure.
270 SAFETY
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-
vent carbon monoxide poisoning:
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
271
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located directional turn signals will flash on and off to
in the lower center area of the instrument warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
panel. the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
NOTE: Warning Flashers.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Emer- This is an emergency warning system and it
gency Stop Signal (ESS) Ú page 217. should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will Assist And SOS Mirror
continue to operate even though the ignition is 1 — SOS Button
placed in the OFF position. 2 — ASSIST Button 7
NOTE: If equipped, the Rearview mirror contains an
With extended use, the Hazard Warning SOS and ASSIST an button.
Flashers may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call cancellation button on the Device Screen.

WARNING! Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to connect you to any one of the following support green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands centers: 2. The LED light located between the SOS and
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
bility and assume all risks related to the use
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and turn green once a connection to a SOS
of the features and applications in this vehi-
you will be connected to a representative for operator has been made.
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
result in an accident involving serious injury what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
or death. Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
system may transmit the following
tance.
important vehicle information to a SOS
NOTE:  SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – operator:
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.  Indication that the occupant placed a
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 360.  Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all SOS Call
other vehicle issues.  The vehicle brand
 The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE SOS Call  The last known GPS coordinates of the
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which vehicle
1. Press or hold the SOS Call button on the
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
Rearview Mirror. 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are NOTE: operator through the vehicle audio system
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, to determine if additional assistance is
4G (data) network. there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS needed.
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
will attempt to remain connected with the

WARNING! SOS operator until the SOS operator termi- WARNING! (Continued)
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to nates the connection.  The SOS Call system is embedded into the
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi- aftermarket electrical equipment to the
appropriate emergency responders and
bility and assume all risks related to the use vehicle’s electrical system. This may
provide them with important vehicle
of the features and applications in this vehi- prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
information and GPS coordinates.
cle. Only use the features and applications to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may ference that can cause the SOS Call system
result in an accident involving serious injury WARNING! to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
or death.  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
NOTE: road conditions or location), do not wait for system or modify the antennas on your
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as voice contact from an Emergency Services vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
authorized by the subscriber. Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
immediately and move to a safe location. DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
 Once a connection is made between the UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-  Never place anything on or near the SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT 7
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a vehicle’s operable network and GPS OPERATE.
voice connection with the vehicle to deter- antennas. You could prevent operable
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
mine if additional assistance is needed. Once network and GPS signal reception, which
system could cause the air bag system to
the SOS operator opens a voice connection can prevent your vehicle from placing an
fail when you need it. You could be injured
with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the oper- emergency call. An operable network and
if the air bag system is not there to help
ator should be able to speak with you or other GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
protect you.
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring Call system to function properly.
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system (Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
WARNING! disconnected during a vehicle crash
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
SOS or other emergency line operators in Global Positioning Satellite signals are
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS unavailable or obstructed
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
system calls. Call system immediately.  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,  The Occupant Restraint Control module facility
any of the following may occur at the time the turns on the air bag Warning Light on the  Operator error by the SOS operator
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of instrument panel if a malfunction in any
each ignition cycle: part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
Warning Light is illuminated, have an congestion
 The Rearview Mirror light located between
the SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously authorized dealer service the Occupant
 Weather
illuminate red. Restraint Control system immediately.
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
 The Device Screen will display the following Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, tunnels
message “Vehicle device requires service. factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
Please contact an authorized dealer.” prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. WARNING!
 An In-Vehicle Audio message will state These include, but are not limited to, the ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
“Vehicle device requires service. Please following factors: the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
contact an authorized dealer.”  The ignition is in the OFF position on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact of the features and applications in this vehi-
 The SOS Call system software and/or hard- cle. Only use the features and applications
ware are damaged during a crash when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE: JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING

 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 360. WARNING!
far from the edge of the roadway as
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/ far enough off the road to avoid the danger WARNING!
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, of being hit when operating the jack or
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
which can prevent your vehicle from placing changing the wheel.
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is enough off the road to avoid being hit when
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the operating the jack or changing the wheel.
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
system to function properly. Never put any part of your body under a
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
NOTE:
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service 3. Apply the parking brake.
Changes or modifications not expressly center where it can be raised on a lift.
approved by the party responsible for compli- 4. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
ance could void the user's authority to operate  Never start or run the engine while the 7
the equipment. vehicle is on a jack.
 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
CAUTION! changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a
clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel

diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Jack And Tools Location Load Floor Handle

1 — Jack
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
2 — Alignment Pin tire, and remove the spare wheel from the
3 — Wheel Bolt Wrench vehicle. The jack will be found beneath.
4 — Emergency Funnel
Wheel Blocked
5 — Screwdriver
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle 1. Open the liftgate.
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
J ACK L OCATION/SPARE T IRE S TOWAGE handle.
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the

rear storage compartment, below the spare tire.
NOTE:
Spare Tire Fastener
Items may vary depending on the trim level.
4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle,

rotate the jack counterclockwise, and lift it
from the foam tray. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-  Never start or run the engine with the
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu- vehicle on a jack.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
parts and the spare tire in the places pro- is on a jack.
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS can be raised on a lift.
WARNING!  Only use the jack in the positions indicated

and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings change.
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
Jack And Tools  If working on or near a roadway, be
your vehicle:
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench extremely careful of motor traffic.
2 — Jack
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
7
from the edge of the roadway as possible
3 — Emergency Funnel are securely stowed, spares must be
before raising the vehicle.
4 — Screwdriver stowed with the valve stem facing the
5 — Alignment Pin  Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. ground.
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
(Continued)
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that

is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange, centering
the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Jack Warning Label Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt Jacking Locations
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use
Rear Lifting Point
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap
off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
Front Lifting Point
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incor- the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
rectly. low this warning may result in serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning

the jack handle counterclockwise.
Rear Jacking Location
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the down on the wrench while at the end of the
flat tire. handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
WARNING! wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 351. If in doubt about the correct
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
Mounting Spare Tire tightness, have them checked with a torque
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off 7
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
NOTE: service station.
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
 For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to 12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. install a center cap or wheel cover on the wheel blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench
compact spare. to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack tire area. Secure the assembly using the
assembly and thread the pin into the wheel  For additional warnings, cautions, and infor-
mation about the spare tire, its use, and means provided. Release the parking brake
hub to assist in mounting the spare tire. before driving the vehicle.
operation Ú page 330.
8. Mount the spare tire.
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
that all wheel bolts are properly seated with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
against the wheel. Tire Service Kit Storage
14. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load
far enough so that it is secured. Once floor behind the rear seat.
placed in position, rotate it clockwise to lock
it in. Replace the alignment pin in the center 1. Open the liftgate.
hole to lock the jack in place. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
WARNING! Tire Service Kit Components
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli- 1 — Mode Select Knob
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu- 2 — Sealant/Air Hose
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack 3 — Hose Accessories
parts and the spare tire in the places pro- 4 — Sealant Bottle
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or 5 — Power Plug
replaced immediately. 6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED 8 — Pressure Gauge
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Load Floor Handle

Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the  Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
prior to the expiration date (printed at the The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
mode.
assure optimum operation of the system. diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
 Selecting Air Mode
 The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application  Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
Push in the Mode Select Knob and hoses.
use and needs to be replaced after each use.
turn to this position for air pump
Always replace these components immedi-
operation only. WARNING!
ately at your original equipment vehicle
 Selecting Sealant Mode dealer.  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
Push in the Mode Select Knob and  When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
turn to this position to inject the form, clean water, and a damp cloth will off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to remove the material from the vehicle or tire when using the Tire Service Kit.
inflate the tire. and wheel components. Once the sealant  Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
 Using The Power Button dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly vehicle under the following circumstances:
discarded.
 If the puncture in the tire tread is 7
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn the Tire Service Kit on.  For optimum performance, make sure the approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
Push and release the Power Button valve stem on the wheel is free of debris larger.
again to turn the Tire Service Kit before connecting the Tire Service Kit.  If the tire has any sidewall damage.
off. You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
  If the tire has any damage from driving
 Using The Deflation Button inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with with extremely low tire pressure.
two needles, located in the Accessory
Push the Deflation Button to Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the  If the tire has any damage from driving
reduce the air pressure in the tire if air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or on a flat tire.
it becomes overinflated. similar inflatable items. However, use only (Continued)
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) the ignition in the OFF position.
 If the wheel has any damage.  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
4. Apply the parking brake.
 If you are unsure of the condition of the latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
tire or the wheel.
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
flames or heat source. of water and drink plenty of water. Do not the cap from the fitting at the end of the
 A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme- hose.
collision or hard stop could endanger the diately.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the next to the deflated tire.
Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Failure to follow these warnings can result Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 3. Remove the cap from the valve
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, stem and then screw the fitting at the
your passengers, and others around you. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers. valve stem.
 Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is the deflated tire) is in a position that is near the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service power outlet.
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This NOTE:
with plenty of water if there is any contact will provide the best positioning of the kit Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon when injecting the sealant into the deflated nails) from the tire.
as possible, if there is any contact with tire and running the air pump. Move the
clothing. vehicle as necessary to place the valve
(Continued) stem in this position before proceeding.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The 2. Connect the Power Plug to a different If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
Deflated Tire: 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the  The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
1. Always start the vehicle before
vehicle is running before turning the Tire to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
Service Kit on. tance.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to 3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
the Sealant Mode position. previous use. Call for assistance. or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
3. After pushing the Power Button, the If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Hose: NOTE:
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
1. Continue to operate the pump
Hose and into the tire. tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
until sealant is no longer flowing
recommended inflation pressure before
NOTE: through hose (typically takes 30 -
continuing.
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
the tire. through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge 1.Push the Power Button to turn off
can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The the Tire Service Kit.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 7
Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose: approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual 2.Remove the speed limit label from
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty. the Tire Service Kit and place sticker
Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant on the steering wheel.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
Hose from the valve stem. Make sure the the tire immediately after the Sealant 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Bottle is empty. Continue to operate from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the pump and inflate the tire to the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the loading information label located in the location.
Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit driver-side door opening. Check the tire
on. pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
Drive Vehicle: 3. Remove the cap from the valve NOTE:

Immediately after injecting sealant stem, and then screw the fitting at the If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle end of the Sealant Hose onto the tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to valve stem. recommended inflation pressure before
ensure distribution of the Tire Service continuing.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert
Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
50 mph (80 km/h). power outlet. valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
WARNING! 5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto the 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat valve stem. storage area in the vehicle.
tire repair. Have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced after using the Tire Ser- 6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
vice Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) turn to the Air Mode position. replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to authorized dealer or tire service center.
follow this warning can result in injuries that 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, Pressure Gauge. steering wheel after the tire has been
and others around you. Have the tire checked
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): repaired.
as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
After Driving: drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. dealer as soon as possible.
Pull over to a safe location. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: NOTE:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove 1. Push the Power Button to turn on When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
the cap from the fitting at the end of the Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to rized dealer or service center that the tire has
hose. the cold tire inflation pressure found been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
on the tire and loading information
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground label located in the driver-side door opening.
next to the deflated tire.
Sealant Bottle Replacement: 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to NOTE:

release.
1. Unwrap the power cord.  For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps in reverse order.
2. Unwrap the hose.
 Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
Rotate The Bottle Up can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor. follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Unwrap The Hose
NOTE:
3. Remove the bottle cover. When using a portable battery booster pack,
7
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
Remove The Bottle
Remove The Bottle Cover

NOTE: See below steps to prepare for jump starting:

CAUTION! The positive battery post is covered with a
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
any other booster source with a system volt- to the post.
turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
system may occur. accessories.
PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START 3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front post.
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly. 4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
Battery Post Cover make sure the ignition is OFF/LOCK.
WARNING!
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Under Hood Battery Location  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
Positive (+) Battery Post could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
Connecting The Jumper Cables

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can Do not connect the jumper cable to the nega-
cable to the positive (+) post of the
burn your skin or eyes and generate tive (-) post of the discharged battery. The
discharged vehicle.
hydrogen gas which is flammable and resulting electrical spark could cause the bat-
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) tery to explode and could result in personal
away from the battery. jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
booster battery. not use any other exposed metal parts.
WARNING! 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
booster battery, let the engine idle for a few
this could establish a ground connection and battery.
minutes, and then start the engine in the
personal injury could result. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) vehicle with the discharged battery.
jumper cable to a good engine ground
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE (exposed metal part of the discharged
disconnecting procedure below.
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
WARNING! the fuel injection system. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 7
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
could result in personal injury or property jumper cable from the engine ground of
damage due to battery explosion. the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
CAUTION! jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown) the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) Emergency Gas Can Refueling
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
vehicle with the discharged battery.
A funnel is provided to allow emergency
If frequent jump starting is required to start your refueling with a gas can.
vehicle, you should have the battery and See below steps for refueling
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer. 1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
CAUTION!
Refueling Funnel 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power as the fuel nozzle.
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, 3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough flapper doors open.
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat- 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat-
tery life and/or prevent the engine from 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
starting. prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel. Inserting Funnel WARNING!
If refueling is necessary, while using an CAUTION!  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
approved gas can, please insert the refueling near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not or the tank is being filled.
open both flappers with the funnel to avoid “top off” the fuel tank after filling. (Continued)
spills.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! WARNING!

 Never add fuel when the engine is running. Driving with a hot cooling system could dam- You or others can be badly burned by hot
This is in violation of most state and federal age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
fire regulations and may cause the reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off from under the hood, do not open the hood
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a until the pointer drops back into the normal until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
portable container that is inside of a range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and try to open a cooling system pressure cap
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
fuel containers on the ground while filling. off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS There are steps that you can take to slow down If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be an impending overheat condition: cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
serviced by an authorized dealer. can use the following procedure to temporarily
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
move the gear selector:
In any of the following situations, you can The A/C system adds heat to the engine
reduce the potential for overheating your cooling system and turning the A/C off can 1. Turn the engine OFF. 7
engine by taking the appropriate action. help remove this heat.
2. Apply the park brake.
 On the highways — slow down.  You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- the blower control to high. This allows the
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase heater core to act as a supplement to the
engine idle speed. radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
3. Grab the boot material rearward of the gear NOTE:

selector and pull up to carefully separate Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
the gear selector bezel and boot assembly only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
from the center console. (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
Gear Selector Override Access Hole without spinning the wheels or racing the
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) engine.
position.
WARNING!
7. The vehicle may then be started in
Gear Selector Bezel Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
NEUTRAL.
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
brake pedal. and tires. A tire could explode and injure
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
down into the gear selector override access faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
hole (at the right rear corner of the gear than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
selector assembly), and push and hold the ping when you are stuck and do not let any-
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
override release lever down. one near a spinning wheel, no matter what
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
the speed.
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch (if necessary), to place
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
“Partial Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
Ú page 214. Once the vehicle has been freed, failure. Allow the engine to idle with the REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
push the ESC OFF switch again to restore “ESC transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
On” mode. minute after every five rocking-motion damage may result.
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
too fast may lead to transmission over-
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
heating and failure. It can also damage the
stuck vehicle.
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(Continued) (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
7
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS 4X4 MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to programmable features in the Uconnect time the driver's door is opened by pressing the
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow Settings. brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
bars and other equipment designed for this If the vehicle’s battery is discharged,
 Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions on shifting the automatic
electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or
Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to main can be moved Ú page 289.
jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
structural members of the vehicle, not to
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State CAUTION!
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow If you must use the accessories (wipers,
must be observed. defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition  Do not use sling-type equipment when
must be in the ON/RUN mode. towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
NOTE:
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the  When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
 You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's door truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle is opened (if the battery is connected, ignition is sion components. Damage to your vehicle
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake may result from improper towing.
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle (Continued)
enabled or disabled via the customer with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,

CAUTION! (Continued) and remains released, while being towed. The CAUTION! (Continued)
 Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is Electric Park Brake does not need to be  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
released, and remains released, while released if all four wheels are OFF the ground. requirements can cause severe transmis-
being towed. sion and/or transfer case damage.
 Do not use a fascia/bumper mounted
CAUTION! Damage from improper towing is not
clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
fascia/bumper face bar will be damaged. Warranty.
requirements can cause severe engine and/
or transmission damage. Damage from  Proper towing or lifting equipment is
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB improper towing is not covered under the New required to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is Vehicle Limited Warranty. Use only tow bars and other equipment
designed for this purpose, following equip-
towed with the ignition in the OFF/LOCK mode.
The only approved method of towing without the 4X4 M ODELS ment manufacturer's instructions.
key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels  Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to OFF the ground. tow bar or other towing devices to main
the vehicle. structural members of the vehicle, not to
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a fascia/bumper or associated brackets. 7
FRONT-W HEEL DRIVE (FWD) M ODELS flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised
— WITH KEY F OB and the opposite end on a towing dolly. EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle CAUTION!
E QUIPPED
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
flatbed.  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
If flatbed equipment is not available, this front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be
Internal damage to the transmission or
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel wheel lift is used when towing.
lift equipment with the front wheels raised). (Continued)
NOTE: Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go TOW EYE USAGE — I F EQUIPPED

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can
subsequently in OFF/LOCK, without opening the be used to move a disabled vehicle.
of damage to the vehicle. door. During towing, remember that not having
the aid of the power brakes and the electrome- When using a tow eye, follow the precautions
chanical power steering will require greater below.
force when applying the brakes and steering of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
 Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Front Tow Hooks Location  Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury. Tow Eye
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to res-  The tow eye must only be used for roadside
cue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use emergencies. Use with an appropriate
tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway device in accordance with highway code (a
towing. You could damage your vehicle. rigid bar or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in
preparation for transport via a tow truck.
Rear Tow Hook Location
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

 The tow eye must not be used to move the Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow This vehicle is equipped with an event data
vehicle off the road or where there are eyes. recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
obstacles. to record data that will assist in understanding
 Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains how a vehicle’s systems performed under
 Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck may break, causing serious injury or death. certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
hookup or highway towing.  Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
 Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck straps may break or become disengaged, obstacle Ú page 255.
vehicle Ú page 290. causing serious injury or death.
 Damage to your vehicle may occur if these  Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
guidelines are not followed. cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS) 7
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Tow Eye Warning Label Ú page 252.
296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil  Check engine oil level.
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
change indicator system. The oil change is performed by someone other than an  Check windshield washer fluid level.
indicator system will remind you that it is time to authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.  Check the tire inflation pressures and look
referring to the steps described under
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 68.
the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
change indicator message will illuminate in the occurs before the oil indicator system turns
NOTE:
instrument cluster. This means that service is on.
Under no circumstances should oil change
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and 
one year or 350 hours of engine run time, and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine as needed.
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
Required” message is displayed. Have your Check function of all interior and exterior
fleet customers. 
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the lights.
next 500 miles (805 km). NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner filter if necessary
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
8
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road condi-

tions, inspect the engine air cleaner, and replace X X X X X X X
if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and
X X X X X X X
boot seals, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
X
pulley, and replace if necessary.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.1 X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes X X
first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 8
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L E NGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Secondary Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
4 — Battery 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
CHECKING OIL L EVEL CAUTION! WARNING!

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will Commercially available windshield washer
oil must be maintained at the correct level. cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as could damage your engine. burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
every fuel stop. The best time to check the or working around the washer solution.
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully ADDING W ASHER FLUID
warmed up engine is shut off.
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level Your vehicle is equipped with a
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
readings. maintenance-free battery. You will never have
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
There are four possible dipstick types: radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
required.
 Crosshatched zone. a few seconds to flush out the residual washer
fluid. WARNING!
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel,
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
low end of the range and MAX at the high end and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
of the range. blade performance. clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
8
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range. system in cold weather, select a solution or or on skin, flush the area immediately with
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature large amounts of water Ú page 285.
NOTE: range of your climate. This rating information (Continued)
Always maintain the oil level within the cross- can be found on most washer fluid containers.
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
PRESSURE WASHING WARNING!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high You can be badly injured working on or
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
pressure washer is not recommended. around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any for which you have the knowledge and the
other booster source with an output greater CAUTION! proper equipment. If you have any doubt
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to Precautions have been taken to safeguard all about your ability to perform a service job,
touch each other. parts and connections however, the pres- take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- sures generated by these machines is such
sories contain lead and lead compounds. that complete protection against water ENGINE OIL
Wash hands after handling. ingress cannot be guaranteed.
Engine Oil Selection
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE For best performance and maximum protection
CAUTION! under all types of operating conditions, FCA only
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
 It is essential when replacing the cables on personnel, special tools, and equipment to recommends engine oils that are API certified
the battery that the positive cable is perform all service operations in an expert and meet the requirements of FCA Material
attached to the positive post and the nega- manner. Service Manuals are available which Standard MS-6395.
tive cable is attached to the negative post. include detailed service information for your
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
negative (-) and are identified on the battery Oil Identification Symbol
attempting any procedure yourself.
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the This symbol means that the oil has
terminal posts and free of corrosion. NOTE: been certified by the American
Intentional tampering with emissions control Petroleum Institute (API). FCA only
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
systems may void your warranty and could recommends API Certified engine oils.
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
result in civil penalties being assessed against
battery cables before connecting the This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
you.
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
charger” to provide starting voltage.
present a problem to the environment. Contact

CAUTION! an authorized dealer, service station or
WARNING!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil governmental agency for advice on how and The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
as the chemicals can damage your engine. where used oil and oil filters can be safely etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi- discarded in your area. the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
cle Limited Warranty. the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
ENGINE OIL FILTER etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
Synthetic Engine Oils The engine oil filter should be replaced with a repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the new filter at every engine oil change. one is near the engine compartment before
recommended oil quality requirements are met, Engine Oil Filter Selection starting the vehicle with the air induction sys-
and the recommended maintenance intervals tem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure
for oil and filter changes are followed. A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be to do so can result in serious personal injury.
used for replacement. The quality of
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the replacement filters varies considerably. Only
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
high quality Mopar certified filters should be
viscosity grade number should not be used. used. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
Materials Added To Engine Oil ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER filters should be used.
FCA strongly recommends against the addition
For the proper maintenance intervals AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE
of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) 8
Ú page 297.
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered For best possible performance, your air
product and its performance may be impaired NOTE: conditioner should be checked and serviced by
by supplemental additives. Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
maintenance interval if applicable. season. This service should include cleaning of
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Filters
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
Care should be taken in disposing of used this time.
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling Cabin Air Filter

WARNING!
R-134a — If Equipped See an authorized dealer for service.
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
cants approved by FCA for your air condi- BODY LUBRICATION
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
tioning system. Some unapproved Locks and all body pivot points, including such
ozone-friendly substance. It is recommended
refrigerants are flammable and can items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
that air conditioning service be performed by an
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
authorized dealer or other service facilities
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
using recovery and recycling equipment.
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
Refer to Warranty Information Book, NOTE: as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
located in your owner’s information kit, for Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG easy operation and to protect against rust and
further warranty information. compressor oil and refrigerants. wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
 The air conditioning system contains refrig- the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
personal injury or damage to the system,
R-1234yf — If Equipped
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a attention should also be given to hood latching
lines to be disconnected should be done by hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the components to ensure proper function. When
an experienced technician. Environmental Protection Agency and is an performing other underhood services, the hood
ozone-friendly substance with a low latch, release mechanism and safety catch
global-warming potential. It is recommended should be cleaned and lubricated.
CAUTION! that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condi- twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
tioning system as the chemicals can damage equipment.
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
your air conditioning components. Such dam- NOTE: lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Warranty. compressor oil, and refrigerants.
WIPER B LADES Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and CAUTION!
the windshield and rear window periodically
with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove against the glass without the wiper blade in
accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and place or the glass may be damaged.
help reduce streaking and smearing.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper full up position.
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield or rear window. Wiper Locking Assembly
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or 1 — Wiper
ice from the windshield or rear window. Make 2 — Locking Tab
sure that they are not frozen to the glass before
turning them on to avoid damaging the blade.
Keep the wiper blade out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, 8
gasoline, etc.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
NOTE: 1 — Wiper
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies 2 — Locking Tab
depending on geographical area and frequency 3 — Wiper Arm
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away arm with the other hand (move the wiper Installing The Front Wipers
from the arm and use one finger push the blade down toward the base of the wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
release tab toward the wiper arm. arm and away from the J hook in the end of
wiper arm is in the full up position.
the wiper arm).
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
Wiper Disengaging the wiper arm until it is latched
1 — Locking Tab Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm (engagement will be accompanied by an
2 — Wiper 1 — Wiper audible click). Fold down the latch release
3 — Release Tab 2 — Locking Tab tab and snap it into its locked position.
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
base of the wiper arm. 6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from snap.
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass. 4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
NOTE: away from the wiper arm to disengage.
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right 1 — Wiper Blade
hand. With your left hand, hold the wiper 2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 8
arm as you pull the wiper blade away from 3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position the wiper arm past its stop far enough to 4 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm. 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
2 — Wiper Arm the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper EXHAUST SYSTEM WARNING! (Continued)

1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from The best protection against carbon monoxide
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be entry into the vehicle body is a properly
park over materials that can burn, such as
raised off of the glass. maintained engine exhaust system. materials might be grass or leaves, and
NOTE: If you notice a change in the sound of the those items that come into contact with
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be your exhaust system. Do not park or
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is detected inside the vehicle; or when the operate your vehicle in areas where your
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; exhaust system can contact anything that
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper have an authorized technician inspect the can burn.
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose CAUTION!
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the connections could permit exhaust fumes to  The catalytic converter requires the use of
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab seep into the passenger compartment. In unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one addition, have the exhaust system inspected destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or an emissions control device and may seri-
the wiper arm until it snaps into place. oil change. Replace as required. ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and WARNING! (Continued)
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
place.
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 267.
(Continued)
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,

CAUTION! (Continued) including a tune-up to FCA specifications, WARNING! (Continued)
 Damage to the catalytic converter can should be obtained immediately.  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter away from the radiator cooling fan when
operating condition. In the event of engine damage: the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
malfunction, particularly involving engine cally and may start at any time, whether the
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-  Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans- engine is running or not.
mance, have your vehicle serviced mission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
promptly. Continued operation of your  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
vehicle with a severe malfunction could towing the vehicle. ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
cause the converter to overheat, resulting temperature controlled and can start at any
in possible damage to the converter and  Do not idle the engine with any ignition
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
vehicle. components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic periods during very rough idle or malfunc- Coolant Checks
converter will not require maintenance. However, tioning operating conditions. Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
it is important to keep the engine properly tuned every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent COOLING SYSTEM weather, where applicable). If the engine
possible catalyst damage. coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
WARNING! system should be drained, flushed and refilled 8
NOTE:
 You or others can be badly burned by hot with fresh engine coolant. Check the front of the
Intentional tampering with emissions control
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
systems can result in civil penalties being
your radiator. If you see or hear steam leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
assessed against you.
coming from under the hood, do not open the water from a garden hose vertically down the
In unusual situations involving grossly hood until the radiator has had time to cool. face of the condenser.
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching Never open a cooling system pressure cap
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn (Continued) Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to as possible. throughout the life of your vehicle.
the system please contact an authorized Please review these recommendations for
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
dealer. using OAT engine coolant that meets the
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as requirements of FCA Material Standard
contains visible sediment, have an authorized they may not be compatible with the radiator MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant engine coolant and may plug the radiator.  We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
(conforming to MS.90032). Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
 This vehicle has not been designed for use
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
maintenance intervals Ú page 297. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
is not recommended. Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
Selection Of Coolant 
For further information Ú page 355.  Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
NOTE: properly could lead to severe internal engine water. Use higher concentrations (not to
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
than specified Organic Additive Technology to the system please contact an authorized
dealer. authorized dealer for assistance.
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec- Adding Coolant  Use only high purity water such as distilled or
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and deionized water when mixing the water/
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic engine coolant solution. The use of lower
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance sion protection in the engine cooling system.
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles NOTE:
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to reducing this extended maintenance period, it
proper level of protection against freezing
is important that you use the same engine
according to the temperatures occurring in Coolant Level

the area where the vehicle is operated. WARNING!
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
 Do not open hot engine cooling system. visual method for determining that the coolant
 Some vehicles require special tools to add
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
properly could lead to severe internal engine
remove the cap to cool an overheated the bottle should be between the “MIN” and
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in “MAX” marks.
to the system, please contact an authorized
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
dealer. As long as the engine operating temperature is
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- while the system is hot or under pressure. satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
mended and can result in cooling system checked once a month.
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed one specified for your vehicle. Personal When additional engine coolant is needed to
in an emergency, have a authorized dealer injury or engine damage may result. maintain the proper level, it should be added to
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible. Disposal Of Used Coolant Cooling System Notes
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
Cooling System Pressure Cap is a regulated substance requiring proper NOTE:
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss disposal. Check with your local authorities to When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure determine the disposal rules for your kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor 8
that engine coolant will return to the radiator community. To prevent ingestion by animals or coming from the front of the engine compart-
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery children, do not store ethylene glycol-based ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
tank if so equipped. coolant in open containers or allow it to remain rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
there is any accumulation of foreign material on or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills freeze) to enter the radiator.
the sealing surfaces.
immediately.
If an examination of your engine compartment necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther- Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis- area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will factory engine cooling performance, poor gas fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
soon dissipate. mileage, and increased emissions. requirements described on the brake fluid
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
 BRAKE SYSTEM expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator In order to ensure brake system performance, fluid level should be checked when pads are
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine all brake system components should be replaced. However, low fluid level may be
coolant needs to be added, the contents of inspected periodically. For the proper caused by a leak and a checkup may be
the coolant expansion bottle must also be maintenance intervals Ú page 297. needed.
protected against freezing.
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
 If frequent engine coolant additions are WARNING! Ú page 356.
required, the cooling system should be pres- Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
sure tested for leaks. and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot WARNING!
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
 Maintain engine coolant concentration at a 
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to in abnormally high brake temperatures, Ú page 356. Using the wrong type of brake
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper excessive lining wear, and possible brake fluid can severely damage your brake
corrosion protection of your engine which damage. You would not have your full braking system and/or impair its performance. The
contains aluminum components. capacity in an emergency. proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
 Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
Brake Master Cylinder
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. voir.
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
 Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your checked when performing under hood services (Continued)
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
keep the front of the condenser clean. illuminated.
 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF transmission fluid level using special service
EQUIPPED tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or Special Additives immediately to have the transmission fluid level
fluid that has been in a tightly closed It is strongly recommended against using any checked. Operating the vehicle with an
container. Keep the master cylinder reser- special additives in the transmission. Automatic improper fluid level can cause severe
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered transmission damage.
a open container absorbs moisture from product and its performance may be impaired
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not CAUTION!
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
add any fluid additives to the transmission. The If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
only exception to this policy is the use of special authorized dealer immediately. Severe trans-
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed mission damage may occur. An authorized
collision.
transmissions. Avoid using transmission dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can sealers as they may adversely affect seals. level accurately.
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. CAUTION! Fluid And Filter Changes
Brake fluid can also damage painted and Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis-
sion as the chemicals can damage your trans- installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
mission components. Such damage is not lubrication for the life of the vehicle. 8
 Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
components could be damaged, causing Fluid Level Check the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
partial or complete brake failure. This could
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
result in a collision.
not require adjustment under normal operating any reason.
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
Selection Of Lubricant FUSES The fuses protect electrical systems against

It is important to use the proper transmission excessive current.
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
General Information
When a device does not work, you must check
performance and life. Use only FCA specified WARNING! the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
transmission fluid Ú page 356. It is important break/melt.
to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct  When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the Also, please be aware that when using power
level using the recommended fluid.
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never outlets for extended periods of time with the
NOTE: replace a fuse with another fuse of higher engine off may result in vehicle battery
No chemical flushes should be used in any amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with discharge.
transmission; only the approved lubricant metal wires or any other material. Do not
should be used. place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
CAUTION! may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Using a transmission fluid other than FCA rec-
ommended fluid may cause deterioration in  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
transmission shift quality and/or torque con- ignition is off and that all the other services
verter shudder. For fluid specifications are switched off and/or disengaged.
Ú page 356.  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer. Blade Fuses
 If a general protection fuse for safety 1 — Fuse Element
systems (air bag system, braking system), 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
power unit systems (engine system, trans- ment
mission system) or steering system blows, 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
contact an authorized dealer. ement (blown fuse)
Fuse Location Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

The fuses are grouped into controllers located Proceed as follows:
in the engine compartment.
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box,
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution slide completely from top to bottom.
Unit
2. Fully depress the screw, using the special
The engine compartment fuse panel is located screwdriver supplied, in the rear cargo area.
near the battery in the engine compartment.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
Fuse Panel & Cover 4. Release the screw.
1 — Cover Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Proceed as follows:
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location 2. Slowly release the screw.

8
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution
F02 70 Amp Tan – –
Units
30 Amp Pink with HID
Lamps
F03 – – Supply Body Computer, HID Lamps
20 Amp Blue without
HID Lamps
F04 – 40 Amp Tan – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 – 40 Amp Tan – PTC Heater
F06 40 Amp Orange – – Starter Relay
F07 40 Amp Orange – – Rear Distribution Unit For Trailer Tow Usage
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Supply For TCM, AGSM, Steering Control
F09 – – 7.5 Amp Brown ECM, TCM, Radiator Fan Control
F10 – – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
20 Amp Yellow – 1.4L
Gas & Diesel Engines
F11 – – ECM/PCM/UREA Fuel Injectors
25 Amp Clear – 2.4 L
Engines/UREA
7.5 Amp Brown – Diesel
Engine Diesel Crankcase Heater
F14 – –
15 Amp Blue – Gas Gasoline LTR Cooling Pump
Engine

F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
Engine Control Module Power, Automatic
F16 – – 10 Amp Red
Transmission
F17 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Secondary Loads
F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F21 – – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
20 Amp Yellow – Gas
Engine Gas - Ign Coil/Fuel Injector Diesel- Diesel
F22 – –
15 Amp Blue – Diesel Components
Engine
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Window Heater Grid
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmis-
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue
sion 8
20 Amp Yellow (Cus-
12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery
F30 – – tomer Selectable, Move
Powered
From F18)
60 Amp Blue — Diesel
F81 – – Glow Plug Module, DDCT SDU Battery Feed
Engine
F82 – 40 Amp Green – Diesel Fuel Filter Heater
F83 – 40 Amp Green – HVAC Fan

F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge)
Dual Battery Control Relay With NON DDCT
10 Amp Red
Fxx – – Trans
7.5 Amp Brown Dual Battery Control Relay With DDCT Trans
The Fuse Box has additional ATO fuse holders installed on the bottom of the box.
Cavity ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse Description

F1 5 Amp Beige Drivetrain Control Module (4x4/AWD)
F2 10 Amp Red ECM — Start Diagnostic Sense
F3 2 Amp Grey Mod Steering Control
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the driver compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger
F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver
Cavity Blade Fuse Description

Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Elec-
F36 20 Amp Yellow
tronic Steering Lock, Power Folding Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV
Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise,
F37 10 Amp Red
ECC (HVAC) Blower
F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Electronic
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Steering Lock, Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor,
Start Stop Switch
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera,
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window, 8
Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane Departure
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
F94 20 Amp Yellow Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit To remove fuse cover, press on the tabs and lift trailer towing) is located closest to the front of
To access the fuses, remove the access door upward. the vehicle.
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Cover Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities

Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Access Door The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse 1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the 2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped with
Fuse Holder No. 1

Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Green Power Inverter
F2 30 Amp Green Memory Seat
F3 20 Amp Yellow Sun Roof – If Equipped
F4 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Passenger Side)
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Lumbar (Power Seats)
Fuse Holder No. 1

F7 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel / Ventilated Seats
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats
Fuse Holder No. 2

F1 10 Amp Red TTM IGN Feed
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side)
F7 10 Amp Red TTM Jumper Battery Feed
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse holder for the Power Liftgate and an ATO / UNI-VAL fuse holder for the
HIFI Audio System.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description 8

F01 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate
Cavity ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse Description

F02 25 Amp Clear HIFI Audio System
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W
Interior Lights HT-168
Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamps (Halogen) H11LL
High Beam Headlamps (Halogen) 9005LL
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) PSX24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps 7444NA
Front Position – Premium LED LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Low Beam / High Beam Headlamps (HID) D3S (HID) (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front – Halogen) W5W
Side Indicators (Front – HID) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Premium Tail Lights: LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights
Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL
W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps
Turn Indicators
W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL
Liftgate Lamp Tail LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) 8
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If NOTE:
— If Equipped an HID headlamp light source fails, take your On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
discharge light source. High voltage can remain blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off. becomes more white after approximately
Because of this, you should not attempt to 10 seconds, as the system charges.
NOTE:
WARNING! We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the head- WARNING!
lamp switch is turned ON. It may cause seri-
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps
ous electrical shock or electrocution if not
only with the engine off. Also make sure that
serviced properly. See an authorized dealer
the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of
for service.
burns.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs Headlamp

Turn Signal Light/Position Lights/Daytime
Headlamps 1 — Low Beam Bulb Cap Running Lights
2 — High Beam Bulb Cap
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
The bulbs can be accessed from behind the 4. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
front wheel liners with the following procedure: clockwise then pull outwards.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
1. Turn the front wheels completely. 5. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp
bulb connector and remove the bulb and 3. Remove the electrical connectors.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
socket.
4. For the DRL bulb, grip the bulb at the top
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cap.
6. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure and bottom locking tabs and squeeze to
it’s properly locked. and remove the bulb.
7. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it 5. To replace the DRL bulb gently push bulb
clockwise making sure it is properly locked. towards housing. Be sure to hear both the
top and bottom locking tabs “CLICK” to
8. Reinstall the wheel liner.
ensure the bulb is properly seated.
6. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counter- Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
clockwise direction and remove the bulb Contain the following:
and bulb socket. Pull the bulb axially to
remove it from the socket.  Position lights
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them  Stop lights
clockwise making sure that it is properly  Direction indicator
locked.
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
Fog Lamp Housing 1. Open the liftgate.
1 — Bulb 2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners.
NOTE:
It is advised referring to an authorized dealer. 5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making
sure the bulb is locked into place.
Front Fog Lights
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
NOTE:
2. Remove the wheel liner. 8
It is advised referring to an authorized dealer.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab
remove the electrical connector. Side Indicators
Body Side Tail Lamp
The Side Indicators are LED. See an authorized
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then 1 — Fasteners Caps
dealer for replacement.
replace the bulb.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by

pushing the release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding
it away from the back of the vehicle.
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp Body Side Tail Lamp

1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb 1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Electrical Connector 2 — Ball Stud
3 — Ball Studs
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp
Body Side Tail Lamp 6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is assembly.
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp properly locked.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
2 — Ball Stud 7. Reposition the rear body side lamp
assembly on the car. NOTE:
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning It is advised referring to an authorized dealer.
and removing the bulb housing. 8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to
align the ball studs.
Reverse Lamps 4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is

properly locked.
1. Open the liftgate.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access
panel for body side lamps, remove lift gate 6. Reinstall the access panels making sure
access cover for lift gate lamps. they are locked in correctly.
7. Finally close the tailgate.
3rd Stop Lamp

Front Courtesy Light
The CHMSL is LED. See an authorized dealer for
replacement. 2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing
License Plate Lights as shown.
The License Plate light is LED. See an

authorized dealer for replacement.
Liftgate Replacing Interior Bulbs
1 — Lift Gate Access Covers Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 8
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release. 1. Using a suitable tool remove the front
courtesy light assembly.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped 3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making
bulb housing. To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: sure that it is properly locked.
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the 4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the
mirror frame with the mirror light cover mirror.
attached. Dome Light Glove Compartment
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
contacts, and then insert the new bulb,
making sure that it is properly locked 1. Open the glove compartment.
between the contacts. 2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly,
pull the bulb to replace it.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they
are properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy
light housing making sure that they are
properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure
that it is properly locked. Visor
1 — Visor Mirror Cover Bulb Removal/Installation
2 — Visor Mirror Light
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
Dome Light
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown;
remove the dome light.
Bulb Bulb Holder

3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the 2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the
contacts. housing.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Grab Handle/Dome Light Interior Cargo Lights
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
side contacts.
1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push
8
bulb holder to the side.
Bulb Holder
3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb. Tire Markings

 Halogen lamps must be handled by
touching only the metallic part. If the trans-
parent bulb is in contact with the fingers,
reduces the intensity of the emitted light
and you can also affect the life of the lamp.
In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb
with a cloth dampened with alcohol and
allow to dry.
Bulb NOTE: Tire Markings

It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
WARNING! by an authorized dealer.
2 — Size Designation
 Modifications or repair of the electrical
system performed incorrectly and without TIRES 3 — Service Description
taking into account the technical character- 4 — Maximum Load
istics can cause malfunctions with the risk
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
5 — Maximum Pressure
of fire. Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, following information: Tire Markings, Tire

Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
ture Grades
in the event of breakage be careful of the
projection of fragments of glass. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
(Continued)
NOTE: width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire high pressure compact spare tires have the
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on preceding the size designation. Example:
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
T145/80D18 103M.
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding on US design standards. The size designation
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric  High flotation tire sizing is based on US
95H. tires except for the letters “LT” that are design standards and it begins with the tire
molded into the sidewall preceding the size diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 31x10.5 R15 LT.
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded  Temporary spare tires are designed for
into the sidewall beginning with the section temporary emergency use only. Temporary
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or 8
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or

 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
8
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a mini-
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
mum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure FCA recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation (3) Subtract the combined weight of the
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading driver and passengers from XXX kg or
Information placard Ú page 127. XXX lbs.
NOTE: (4) The resulting figure equals the
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
available amount of cargo and luggage
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
Ú page 127. amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
To determine the maximum loading conditions
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
Tire And Loading Information Placard combined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
This placard tells you important information should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
about the: Tire and Loading Information placard. The (5) Determine the combined weight of
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
1. Number of people that can be carried in luggage and cargo being loaded on the
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
the vehicle. never exceed the weight referenced here.
vehicle. That weight may not safely
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
exceed the available cargo and luggage
Steps For Determining Correct Load load capacity calculated in Step 4.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Limit— 8
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, (1) Locate the statement “The combined load from your trailer will be transferred
rear, and spare tires. weight of occupants and cargo should to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your determine how this reduces the
Loading
vehicle's placard. available cargo and luggage load
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on (2) Determine the combined weight of capacity of your vehicle.
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load the driver and passengers that will be
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading riding in your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit NOTE: and number and size of occupants. This table
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg is for illustration purposes only and may not
 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load be accurate for the seating and load carry
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your from your trailer will be transferred to your capacity of your vehicle.
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and vehicle. The following table shows examples
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 on how to calculate total load, cargo/  For the following example, the combined
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. luggage, and towing capacities of your weight of occupants and cargo should never
vehicle with varying seating configurations exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the

WARNING! stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over- WARNING! of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle  Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and the steering.
handling, and increase your stopping dis- can cause collisions. NOTE:
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload  Underinflation increases tire flexing and  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
them. can result in overheating and tire failure. cause erratic and unpredictable steering
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to response.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION cushion shock. Objects on the road and
 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
chuckholes can cause damage that result
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Pressure in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Overinflated or underinflated tires can Fuel Economy
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. affect vehicle handling and can fail Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
pressure: control.
Tread Wear
 Safety  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
 Fuel Economy abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, 8
vehicle.
resulting in the need for earlier tire
 Tread Wear  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the replacement.
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the Proper tire inflation contributes to a
recommended cold tire inflation pressure. comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the inflation pressure is very important. Increased
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the tire sidewall. be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
driver's side door. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
At least once a month: safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good inflation pressures.
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
make a visual judgment when determining (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature WARNING!
proper inflation. Tires may look properly change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the High speed driving with your vehicle under
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Winter. maximum load is dangerous. The added
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
damage. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) You could have a serious collision. Do not
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac-
the cold tire inflation pressure should be ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
CAUTION!
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (120 km/h).
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will temperature condition.
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Radial Ply Tires
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
valve stem, which could damage the valve
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce WARNING!
stem.
this normal pressure build-up or your tire Combining radial ply tires with other types of
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are pressure will be too low. tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation handle poorly. The instability could cause a
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
FCA advocates driving at safe speeds and
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least four. Never combine them with other types of
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) tires.
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
Tire Repair A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation Tire Spinning
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
repaired if it meets the following criteria: Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
limited driving capabilities and needs to be above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
 The tire has not been driven on when flat. replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not seconds continuously without stopping
 The damage is only on the tread section of repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed Ú page 290.
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not WARNING!
 The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an designed to be reused when driven under Run
inch (6 mm). Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs NOTE: cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
and additional information. TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that vehicle on a flat tire condition. vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
have experienced a loss of pressure should be for more than 30 seconds continuously when
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
of identical size and service description (Load spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
the Run Flat mode.
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to For more information Ú page 227.
be reused. 8
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire NOTE:

Tread wear indicators are in the original The service life of a tire is dependent upon Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
equipment tires to help you in determining varying factors including, but not limited to: when installing new tires due to wear and tear
when your tires should be replaced. in existing tires.
 Driving style.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, Replacement Tires
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
ment. of many characteristics. They should be
 Distance driven. inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of recommends that you use tires equivalent to
Tire Tread V or higher, and Summer tires typically have the originals in size, quality and performance
1 — Worn Tire a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires when replacement is needed Ú page 340.
2 — New Tire per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
highly recommended. placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the
These indicators are molded into the bottom of size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands WARNING! Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an Tires and the spare tire should be replaced original equipment tire sidewall.
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the after six years, regardless of the remaining For more information relating to the Load Index
tread wear indicators, the tire should be tread. Failure to follow this warning can result and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 330.
replaced Ú page 340. in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
or death.
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
wheel’s specifications match those of the WARNING! (Continued) and handling of your vehicle.
original wheels.  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
It is recommended you contact an authorized Equipped
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
questions you may have on tire specifications or
overloading and failure. You could lose dry conditions, and are not intended to be
capability. Failure to use equivalent
control and have a collision. driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
replacement tires may adversely affect the
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. 
having adequate speed capability can tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
WARNING! result in sudden tire failure and loss of conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
vehicle control. when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
speed rating other than that specified for For more information, contact an authorized
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap- CAUTION! dealer.
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance Replacing original tires with tires of a differ- Summer tires do not contain the all season
characteristics, resulting in changes to ent size may result in false speedometer and designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
steering, handling, and braking of your odometer readings. the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the 8
handling and stress to steering and TIRE TYPES safety and handling of your vehicle.
suspension components. You could lose
All Season Tires — If Equipped WARNING!
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
tions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting
your vehicle. levels may vary between different all season
in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
(Continued) tires. All season tires can be identified by the
conditions also creates the possibility of loss
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
of vehicle control.
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
Snow Tires SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

Some areas of the country require the use of The compact spare is for temporary emergency
NOTE:
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol equipped with a compact spare by looking at
instead of a spare tire Ú page 280.
on the tire sidewall. the spare tire description on the Tire and
If you need snow tires, select tires Loading Information Placard located on the
CAUTION! driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow Because of the reduced ground clearance, do the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
tires only in sets of four; failure to do not take your vehicle through an automatic with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
so may adversely affect the safety and handling car wash with a compact or limited use tem- designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
of your vehicle. porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
may result.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
than what was originally equipped with your For restrictions when towing with a spare tire equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
vehicle and should not be operated at designated for temporary emergency use and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For Ú page 131. opportunity.
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
for recommended safe operating speeds, And Wheel — If Equipped
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire compact spare tire. Do not install more than
While studded tires improve performance on and wheel equivalent in look and function to the one compact spare tire and wheel on the
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry original equipment tire and wheel found on the vehicle at any given time.
surfaces may be poorer than that of front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
checked before using these tire types. authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
WARNING!
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped SNOW TRACTION D EVICES
The limited use spare tire is for temporary Use of traction devices require sufficient
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem- emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
porary emergency use only. With these tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
label located on the limited use spare wheel. the following snow traction devices are
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph This label contains the driving limitations for
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- recommended. Follow these recommendations
this spare. This tire may look like the original to guard against damage:
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited  Snow traction device must be of proper size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it for the tire, as recommended by the snow
follow the warnings, which apply to your is not the same as your original equipment tire, traction device manufacturer.
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare replace (or repair) the original equipment tire  No other tire sizes are recommended for use
tire failure and loss of vehicle control. and reinstall on the vehicle at the first with the snow traction device.
opportunity.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped  Please follow the table below for the recom-
WARNING! mended tire size, axle and snow traction
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
device:
use only. This tire may look like the originally Limited use spares are for emergency use
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the drive more than the speed listed on the lim- 8
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full ited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
not the same as your original equipment tire, and Loading Information Placard located on
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
opportunity. original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
FWD Snow Traction Device (maximum projection

Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Trim Level beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Sport
215/65R16
Latitude Front 7 mm Cable Chain
16 x 6.5 x 40 mm
Limited
AWD Snow Traction Device (maximum projection

Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Trim Level beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Sport
Latitude 215/65R16
Front 7mm Cable Chain
Limited 16 x 6.5 x 40mm
Trailhawk
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,  Because of restricted traction device clear-  Install device as tightly as possible and
Snow) between front and rear axles can ance between tires and other suspension then retighten after driving about ½ mile
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose components, it is important that only trac- (0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
control and have a collision. tion devices in good condition are used. require retightening.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
CAUTION! occurs that could indicate device breakage.  Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
Remove the damaged parts of the device large bumps, especially with a loaded
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
before further use. vehicle.
observe the following precautions:
(Continued) (Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 297. The reasons for any rapid or
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry unusual wear should be corrected prior to UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
pavement. rotation being performed. The following tire grading categories
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s The suggested rotation method is the “forward were established by the National
instructions on the method of installation, cross” shown in the following diagram. This Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
operating speed, and conditions for use. rotation pattern does not apply to some The specific grade rating assigned by the
Always use the suggested operating speed directional tires that must not be reversed.
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
tire's manufacturer in each category is
than 30 mph (48 km/h). shown on the sidewall of the tires on
 Do not use traction devices on a compact
your vehicle.
spare tire. All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS addition to these grades.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different TREADWEAR
steering, handling, and braking functions. For The Treadwear grade is a comparative
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) rating, based on the wear rate of the tire 8
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation when tested under controlled conditions
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially CAUTION! on a specified government test course.
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles For example, a tire graded 150 would
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will depends on tires of equal size, type and cir- wear one and one-half times as well on
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, cumference on each wheel. Any difference in
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a the government course as a tire graded
tire size can cause damage to the power
smooth, quiet ride. transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be
100. The relative performance of tires
followed to balance tire wear. depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to TEMPERATURE G RADES WARNING!

variations in driving habits, service The Temperature grades are A (the
practices, and differences in road The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
characteristics and climate. resistance to the generation of heat and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
TRACTION G RADES its ability to dissipate heat, when tested tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
under controlled conditions on a in combination, can cause heat build-up and
The Traction grades, from highest to possible tire failure.
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet Sustained high temperature can cause
pavement, as measured under the material of the tire to degenerate
STORING THE VEHICLE
controlled conditions on specified and reduce tire life, and excessive If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
government test surfaces of asphalt and temperature can lead to sudden tire
following steps to minimize the drain on your
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor failure. The grade C corresponds to a vehicle's battery:
traction performance. level of performance, which all
 Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
passenger vehicle tires must meet
WARNING! under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
The traction grade assigned to this tire is Standard No. 109. Grades B and A of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
based on straight-ahead braking traction represent higher levels of performance more, run the air conditioning system at idle
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- for about five minutes in the fresh air and
on the laboratory test wheel, than the high blower setting. This will ensure
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
minimum required by law. adequate system lubrication to minimize the
teristics.
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
NOTE: and other extreme conditions will have an corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
When the vehicle has not been started or driven adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and solution recommended for the body of the
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Starting underbody protection. vehicle and remember to always wash when the
is required to start the vehicle Ú page 86. The following maintenance recommendations surfaces are not hot to the touch.
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
CAUTION! the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
Before removal of the positive and negative chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
What Causes Corrosion? chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
terminals to the battery, wait at least a min-
ute with ignition switch in the OFF position Corrosion is the result of deterioration or dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
and close the driver’s door. When reconnect- removal of paint and protective coatings from soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
ing the positive and negative terminals to the your vehicle. chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
battery be sure the ignition switch is in the The most common causes are: wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed. from corroding and tarnishing.
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
BODYWORK  Stone and gravel impact. CAUTION!

Insects, tree sap and tar. Avoid products or automatic car washes that
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC 
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
AGENTS  Salt in the air near seacoast localities. tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes 8
Vehicle body care requirements vary according  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals may damage the wheel's protective finish.
that make roads passable in snow and ice and BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
those that are sprayed on trees and road cle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum mended.
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
to maintain their luster and to prevent excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is material to clean the lenses.
recommended or select a non-abrasive, CAUTION!
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
wheels. cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, Washing
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
CAUTION! permanently damage this finish and such your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING panels completely with water.
products may damage the wheel's protective MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
finish. Such damage is not covered by the Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash required to maintain this finish.
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
Cleaning Headlights remove.
recommended.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
NOTE: and fog lights that are lighter and less Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for susceptible to stone breakage than glass stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
an extended period after cleaning the wheels headlights. precautions to not scratch the paint.
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
the brake components. This activity will remove therefore different lens cleaning procedures buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent must be followed. out the paint finish.
vehicle vibration when braking. To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,  Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
CAUTION! consider mud or stone shields behind each towel.
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning wheel.
 For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
materials such as steel wool or scouring
 Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
powder that will scratch metal and painted
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
surfaces.
touch up paint to match the color of your remove soap residue.
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi vehicle.
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or  For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
removal of paint and decals. INTERIORS Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
Special Care SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS soap residue.
 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric  Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- upholstery and carpeting. form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
riage at least once a month.
WARNING! Seat Belt Maintenance
 It is important that the drain holes in the
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur- chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
trunk be kept clear and open. poses. Many are potentially flammable, and if weaken the fabric.
used in closed areas they may cause respira-
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap 8
tory harm.
the paint, touch them up immediately. solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
or similar cause that destroys the paint and soft cloth.
Equipped
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
as soon as possible. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
following manner:
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, or if the buckles do not work properly.
 Remove as much of the stain as possible by
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
materials are well packaged and sealed.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster NOTE:

WARNING! If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
Lenses
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a colli- The lenses in front of the instruments in this show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
the belt system periodically, checking for cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts avoid scratching the plastic. mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
must be replaced immediately. Do not disas- on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
semble or modify the system. Seat belt Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
assemblies must be replaced after a collision may be used, but do not use high alcohol CAUTION!
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retrac- content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
tor, torn webbing, etc.).
soft cloth. Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the uphol-
PLASTIC AND C OATED PARTS LEATHER SURFACES stery may result.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery. GLASS SURFACES
CAUTION! Your leather upholstery can be best preserved All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive commercial household-type glass cleaner.
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated and damage the leather upholstery and should Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
surfaces of the interior may cause perma- be removed promptly with a damp cloth. when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
nent damage. Wipe away immediately. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft with electric defrosters or windows equipped
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
 Damage caused by these type of products
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery other sharp instruments that may scratch the
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, elements.
Limited Warranty.
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
upholstery. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
351
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
on the left front corner of the windshield and is ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
visible from the outside of the vehicle. the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
100 Ft-Lbs bolt (do not insert it halfway).
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
(135 N·m)
Vehicle Identification Number
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
NOTE: bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or 9
loose particles.
Torque Patterns
352 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak, experience these symptoms, try another brand
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops, of gasoline before considering service for the
properly tightened. the “Brake Warning Light” will light. vehicle.
WARNING! WARNING! 2.4L E NGINE

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning This engine is designed to meet all
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully Light” on is dangerous. A significant decrease emissions regulations and provide
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to in braking performance or vehicle stability excellent fuel economy and
follow this warning may result in personal during braking may occur. It will take you lon- performance when using high quality
injury. ger to stop the vehicle or will make your vehi- unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane
cle harder to control. You could have a rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use
collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi- of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
BRAKE SYSTEM ately. will not provide any benefit over regular
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted gasoline in these engines.
brakes as standard equipment. In the event
FUEL REQUIREMENTS REFORMULATED G ASOLINE
power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine While operating on gasoline with the required Many areas of the country require the use of
off), the brakes will still function. However, the octane number, hearing a light knocking sound cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much from the engine is not a cause for concern. “reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
greater than that required with the power However, if the engine is heard making a heavy gasoline contains oxygenates and are
system operating. knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use specifically blended to reduce vehicle
of gasoline with a lower than recommended emissions and improve air quality.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still octane number can cause engine failure and The use of reformulated gasoline is
function with some loss of overall braking may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle recommended. Properly blended reformulated
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased Limited Warranty. gasoline will provide improved performance
pedal travel during application and greater Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such and durability of engine and fuel system
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you components.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 353
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS E-85 U SAGE I N NON-F LEX FUEL components. Problems that result from running
V EHICLES CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
with oxygenates such as ethanol. Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
CAUTION! (E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing metha- may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. GASOLINE
nol, or gasoline containing more than 15% eth- If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
anol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of additive that is blended into some gasoline to
starting and drivability problems, damage criti- these symptoms: increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
cal fuel system components, cause emissions
 Operate in a lean mode. provides no performance advantage beyond
to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
gasoline of the same octane number without
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi-  OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
nate. Please observe pump labels as they
 Poor engine performance. spark plug life and reduces emissions system
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
performance in some vehicles. FCA
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).  Poor cold start and cold drivability. recommends that gasoline without MMT be
Problems that result from using gasoline  Increased risk for fuel system component used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or corrosion. gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
gasoline containing methanol are not the pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline
responsibility of FCA and may void the New CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MODIFICATIONS MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
Vehicle Limited Warranty. 9
reformulated gasoline.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS CAUTION! (Continued)

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
CAUTION!  The use of fuel additives, which are now
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehi- recommended. Most of these products
recommended. Using gasolines that have these cle’s performance: contain high concentrations of methanol.
additives will help improve fuel economy,  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can mance problems resulting from the use of
performance. impair engine performance and damage such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
Designated TOP TIER Detergent the emissions control system. bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
Gasoline contains a higher level of under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
detergents to further aide in tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic NOTE:
minimizing engine and fuel system converter to overheat. If you notice a Intentional tampering with the emissions
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP pungent burning odor or some light smoke, control system can result in civil penalties being
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit your engine may be out of tune or malfunc- assessed against you.
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER tioning and may require immediate service.
Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Contact an authorized dealer for service
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning assistance.
agents should be avoided. Many of these (Continued)
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 355
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 13.5 Gallons 51 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Gasoline Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Gasoline Engine 6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Miles (240,000 Kilo-
Engine Coolant meters) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to 9
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil Filter is unavail-
Engine Oil Filter able, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Require-
ments.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (FWD Models) – If Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the cor-
Equipped rect fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission (4WD Models) – If Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure
Equipped to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
(API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
357
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
FOR YOUR VEHICLE appointment. Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE center should include the following information:
All work to be performed may not be covered by  Owner's name and address
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with interested in your satisfaction. We want you to  Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log be happy with our products and services. and office)
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
Warranty service must be done by an  Authorized dealer name
provide a clue to the current problem.
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
PREPARE A L IST you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
They know your vehicle the best, and are most Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or 
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
maintenance log, let the service advisor know. P.O. Box 21–8004
special tools, and the latest information to
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
timely manner. Phone: (877) 426-5337
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the This is why you should always talk to an
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
situation with the service advisor and list the authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
items in order of priority. At many authorized some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to P.O. Box 1621 10
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle the general manager or owner of the authorized Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
(additional charges may apply). If you need a dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
358 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO in the United States, can communicate with FCA FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479. contract you may have purchased from another
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 manufacturer. If you require service after the
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 require assistance can use the special needs FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mexico, D. F. relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY expires, please refer to the contract documents,
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice and contact the person listed in those
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300 documents.
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 Bell Relay Service operator. We appreciate that you have made a major
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
SERVICE CONTRACT authorized dealer has also made a major
FCA Caribbean LLC You may have purchased a service contract for investment in facilities, tools, and training to
P.O. Box 191857 a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost assure that you are absolutely delighted with
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New the ownership experience.
San Juan 00919-1857
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Phone: (877) 426-5337 Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle WARNING!
Fax: (787) 782-3345 extended protection plans authorized, Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide only), some of its constituents, and certain
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE additional protection beyond your vehicle’s vehicle components contain, or emit, chemi-
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED (TDD/ warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle cals known to the State of California to cause
TTY) Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail tive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
To assist customers who have hearing within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special tained in vehicles and certain products of
If you have any questions about the service component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing known to the State of California to cause can-
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 cer and birth defects, or other reproductive
or speech impaired customer, who has access (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) harm.
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 359
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
See the Warranty Information for the terms and I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
WASHINGTON, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.mopar.com/om for further information. If you believe that your vehicle has a www.safercar.gov; or write to:
See the Warranty Information for the terms and defect that could cause a crash or cause Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties injury or death, you should immediately Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to inform the National Highway Traffic D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further Safety Administration (NHTSA) in information about motor vehicle safety
information. from http://www.safercar.gov.
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA
may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the
vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who
MOPAR® PARTS cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the
Mopar® original equipment parts & problems between you, an authorized Canadian government should contact
accessories and factory filled fluids are dealer, or FCA US LLC.
available from an authorized dealer. They are
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
recommended for your vehicle to keep it Investigations and Recalls at
operating at its best and maintain its original 1-800-333-0510 or go to
10
condition. wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
360 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
To order the following manuals, you may use Development applicables aux appareils radio
either the website or the phone numbers listed To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit: exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
below. aux deux conditions suivantes:
Service Manuals  www.techauthority.com (US)
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide Or brouillage, et
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle, Call Tech Authority toll free at:
system, and/or components and is written in 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
straightforward language with illustrations,  1-800-890-4038 (US) brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
diagrams, and charts. brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
mettre le fonctionnement.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. The following regulatory statement applies to all siguientes dos condiciones:
These manuals make it easy to find and fix Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
problems on computer-controlled vehicle vehicle:
cause interferencia perjudicial y
systems and features. They show exactly how to This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
find and correct problems, using step-by-step Rules and with Innovation, Science and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, Economic Development Canada license-exempt cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the pueda causar su operación no deseada.
tools and equipment. following two conditions:
NOTE:
Owner's Manuals 1. This device may not cause harmful Changes or modifications not expressly
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared interference, and approved by the party responsible for compli-
with the assistance of service and engineering ance could void the user’s authority to operate
2. This device must accept any interference the equipment.
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
received, including interference that may
LLC vehicles.
cause undesired operation.
361
INDEX
 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 303, 304 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................37
Phone ............................................................172 Air Conditioner System ................................. 303 Automatic Door Locks ......................................25
 WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................359 Air Conditioning Filter ..............................51, 304 Automatic Headlights .......................................41
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................50 Automatic High Beams.....................................40
A Air Filter ........................................................ 303 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............49
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)........................104 Air Pressure Automatic Transaxle ........................................93
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............310 Tires ......................................................... 338 Automatic Transmission...................................94
Additives, Fuel ...............................................354 Alarm Adding Fluid ..................................... 313, 356
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................179 Arm The System ..........................................20 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 313
Air Bag ...........................................................242 Disarm The System .....................................21 Fluid Change............................................. 313
Air Bag Operation ......................................243 Security Alarm ...................................... 20, 77 Fluid Level Check...................................... 313
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 241, 243 Alarm System Fluid Type ........................................ 314, 356
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................248 Security Alarm .............................................20 Special Additives ...................................... 313
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 252, 295 Alterations/Modifications Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode......25
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................295 Vehicle........................................................... 9 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........53
Front Air Bag .............................................243 Android Auto ........................................ 181, 183 Axle Fluid....................................................... 356
If Deployment Occurs ................................251 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 310, 355 Axle Lubrication ............................................ 356
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................248 Disposal ................................................... 311
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............254 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 212 B
Maintenance .............................................254 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................78 Battery ................................................... 76, 301
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............241 Apple CarPlay ....................................... 181, 185 Charging System Light .................................76
Side Air Bags .............................................248 Arming System Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................14
Transporting Pets ......................................267 Security Alarm .............................................20 Belts, Seat .................................................... 267
Air Bag Light ........................................ 241, 267 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 219 Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 221
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Audio Settings ............................................... 165 Bluetooth
Filter) .............................................................303 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 138 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Au- 11
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................303 Auto Down Power Windows .............................55 dio Device After Pairing ........................ 174
362
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................304 Cellular Phone .............................................. 210 Computer, Trip/Travel ......................................74
B-Pillar Location.............................................334 Certification Label......................................... 127 Connected Services ...................................... 186
Brake Assist System ......................................213 Chains, Tire ................................................... 343 Connected Services FAQ ............................... 204
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................213 Change Oil Indicator ........................................68 Connected Services Features ....................... 190
Brake Fluid ....................................................356 Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 275 Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 188
Brake System ...................................... 312, 352 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 331 Connected Services, Introduction ................. 186
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................352 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Connector
Fluid Check ..................................... 312, 356 Light)................................................................84 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .............52
Master Cylinder .........................................312 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 267 Console ............................................................52
Parking ........................................................ 89 Checks, Safety .............................................. 267 Floor ............................................................52
Warning Light .............................................. 74 Child Restraint .............................................. 255 Contract, Service ........................................... 358
Brake/Transmission Interlock ......................... 94 Child Restraints Controls ........................................................ 159
Brightness, Interior Lights......................... 42, 43 Booster Seats ........................................... 258 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 311
Bulb Replacement .........................................322 Child Seat Installation .............................. 265 Cooling System ............................................. 309
Bulbs, Light....................................................269 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 263 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 310
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 257 Coolant Level ................................... 309, 311
C Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 260 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 355
Camera, Rear ................................................124 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 257 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 311
Capacities, Fuel .............................................355 Seating Positions ...................................... 259 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 309
Caps, Filler Child Safety Locks ...........................................25 Inspection ................................................. 311
Fuel ...........................................................126 Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 352 Points To Remember ................................ 311
Oil (Engine) ................................................300 Cleaning Pressure Cap ............................................ 311
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................311 Wheels ..................................................... 347 Radiator Cap............................................. 311
Car Washes ...................................................348 Windshield Wiper Blades.......................... 305 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 310, 355
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 269, 270 Climate Control ................................................46 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 347
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 62 Automatic ....................................................46 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................... 104
Cargo Load Floor ............................................. 62 Coin Holder ......................................................52 Cruise Light ........................................82, 83, 84
Cargo Tie-Downs ....................................... 62, 63 Cold Weather Operation ..................................87 Customer Assistance .................................... 357
CD..................................................................167 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 342 Cybersecurity ................................................ 138
363
D Electrical Power Outlets ...................................53 Enhanced Accident Response

Daytime Running Lights ................................... 40 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 214 Feature ................................................ 252, 295
Dealer Service ...............................................302 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.........76 Ethanol.......................................................... 353
Defroster, Windshield ....................................268 Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 288 Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 269, 270
Deleting A Phone ...........................................174 Emergency, In Case Of Exhaust System ................................... 269, 308
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................... 84 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 271 Exterior Lighting ...............................................40
Dimmer Switch Jacking ..................................................... 275 Exterior Lights ........................................ 40, 269
Headlight..................................................... 40 Jump Starting ........................................... 285
Dipsticks Tow Hooks ................................................ 293 F
Oil (Engine) ................................................301 Towing ...................................................... 292 Family Alerts ................................................. 203
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................292 Emission Control System Maintenance ...........84 Filters
Disc Drive ......................................................167 Engine........................................................... 300 Air Cleaner ................................................ 303
Disconnecting ................................................174 Air Cleaner ................................................ 303 Air Conditioning ................................. 51, 304
Disposal Block Heater ................................................88 Engine Oil ........................................ 303, 355
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................311 Break-In Recommendations ........................89 Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 303
Disturb ...........................................................177 Checking Oil Level .................................... 301 Flashers
Door Ajar................................................... 76, 77 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 355 Hazard Warning ........................................ 271
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 76, 77 Cooling ..................................................... 309 Turn Signals ......................... 40, 42, 82, 269
Drag & Drop ...................................................157 Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 269, 270 Flash-To-Pass ............................................40, 41
Driver Memory Presets ..................................164 Fails To Start ...............................................88 Flat Tire Changing ................................ 330, 342
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 28 Flooded, Starting .........................................88 Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 330, 342
Driving ...........................................................134 Jump Starting ........................................... 285 Flooded Engine Starting ...................................88
Oil .................................................... 302, 355 Floor Console ...................................................52
E Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 300 Fluid Capacities ............................................ 355
Easy Entry Seats .............................................. 32 Oil Filter .................................................... 303 Fluid Leaks.................................................... 269
Electric Brake Control System .......................213 Oil Selection .................................... 302, 355 Fluid Level Checks
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................212 Oil Synthetic ............................................. 303 Brake ........................................................ 312
Traction Control System .................. 217, 220 Overheating .............................................. 289 Engine Oil ................................................. 301 11
Electric Parking Brake ..................................... 89 Starting........................................................86 Fluid, Brake ................................................... 356
364
Fog Lights ................................................. 40, 42 H Instrument Cluster .............................65, 67, 68

Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 28 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 271 Descriptions.................................................82
Folding Rear Seats .......................................... 30 Head Restraints ...............................................34 Display ...........................................67, 68, 69
Forward Collision Warning .............................225 Head Rests ......................................................34 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 350
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................290 Headlights .......................................................40 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 349
Fuel ...............................................................352 Automatic ....................................................41 Interior Fuses ................................................ 318
Additives ...................................................354 Cleaning ................................................... 348 Interior Lights ...................................................42
Clean Air ....................................................352 Delay ...........................................................41 Inverter
Ethanol ......................................................353 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........40 Power...........................................................54
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)...................................126 Lights On Reminder .............................. 40, 41 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................................52
Gasoline ....................................................352 Passing .................................................40, 41
Light ............................................................ 79 Switch ..........................................................40 J
Materials Added ........................................354 Time Delay............................................ 40, 41 Jack Location ................................................ 276
Methanol ...................................................353 Heated Mirrors.......................................... 37, 39 Jack Operation ..................................... 275, 277
Octane Rating ................................. 352, 355 Heated Seats ...................................................33 Jacking Instructions ...................................... 277
Specifications............................................355 Heater, Engine Block .......................................88 Jump Starting ................................................ 285
Tank Capacity ............................................355 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Fuses .............................................................314 Switch ..............................................................40 K
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 218 Key Fob
G Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 218 Arm The Alarm .............................................20
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............................126 Hill Start Assist.............................................. 219 Disarm The Alarm ........................................21
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................352 Holder, Coin .....................................................52 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............15
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................352 Hood Prop ........................................................59 Remote Keyless Entry ..................................13
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................352 Hood Release ..................................................59 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Gear Ranges .................................................... 95 Entry) ...............................................................14
Gear Selector Override ..................................289 I Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Glass Cleaning ...............................................350 Ignition .............................................................16 Entry) ...............................................................15
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............................128 Switch ..........................................................16 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...................................13, 22
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..........................128 Inside Rearview Mirror ............................37, 271 Keys .................................................................13
GVWR ............................................................127
365
L Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 218 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 304
Lane Change And Turn Signals ................. 40, 42 Instrument Cluster.......................................40 Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 351
Lane Change Assist .................................. 40, 42 Intensity Control ................................... 42, 43 Luggage Carrier ................................................64
LaneSense ....................................................120 Interior .........................................................42
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................233 Lights On Reminder .............................. 40, 41 M
Latches ..........................................................269 Low Fuel ......................................................79 Maintenance ....................................................58
Hood ........................................................... 59 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)..........79 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 301
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................269 Park .............................................................82 Maintenance Schedule ................................. 296
Life Of Tires ...................................................340 Passing .................................................40, 41 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....79
Liftgate ..................................................... 59, 60 Seat Belt Reminder .....................................75 Manual
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ....................... 45 Security Alarm .............................................77 Service ...................................................... 360
Light Bulbs .....................................................269 Service ..................................................... 322 Media Mode .................................................. 167
Lights .............................................................269 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 227 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................27
Air Bag ............................................. 241, 267 Traction Control ........................................ 217 Memory Seat ....................................................27
Automatic Headlights .................................. 41 Turn Signals .........................40, 42, 82, 269 Memory Settings ..............................................27
Battery Saver............................................... 42 Vanity Mirror ................................................38 Methanol....................................................... 353
Brake Assist Warning ................................217 Warning Instrument Cluster Mini-Trip Computer ..........................................74
Brake Warning ............................................ 74 Descriptions .....................................76, 82 Mirrors .............................................................37
Bulb Replacement .....................................322 Load Floor, Cargo.............................................62 Automatic Dimming .....................................37
Cruise ............................................ 82, 83, 84 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .......................72 Heated ..................................................37, 39
Daytime Running......................................... 40 Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................72 Outside .................................................37, 38
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 40 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............72 Rearview ............................................ 37, 271
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...............72 Vanity ...........................................................38
Indicator.................................................. 76 Loading Vehicle ............................................ 127 Modifications/Alterations
Exterior ......................................................269 Tires ......................................................... 334 Vehicle ........................................................... 9
Fog .............................................................. 42 Locks Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 227
Headlight Switch ......................................... 40 Auto Unlock .................................................25 Mopar Parts .................................................. 359
Headlights ................................................... 40 Child Protection ...........................................25 Multi-Function Control Lever ............................40 11
High Beam .................................................. 40 Power Door ..................................................22
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 40 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 227
366
N Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................37, 38 R

New Vehicle Break-In Period............................ 89 Overheating, Engine...................................... 289 Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 338
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 311
O P Radio
Occupant Restraints ......................................231 Paddle Shifters ................................................97 Presets ..................................................... 164
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 352, 355 Paint Care ..................................................... 347 Radio Controls .............................................. 159
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................303 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Radio Mode................................................... 159
Oil Filter, Selection.........................................303 Phone  ..................................................... 172 Radio Operation ................................... 159, 210
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 77 Parking Brake ..................................................89 Radio Remote Controls ................................. 158
Oil, Engine ........................................... 302, 355 ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 116 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................44
Capacity ....................................................355 Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................ 157 Rear Camera ................................................. 124
Checking ...................................................301 Pets .............................................................. 267 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 223
Dipstick .....................................................301 Phone Mode ................................................. 169 Rear ParkSense System................................ 116
Disposal ....................................................303 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 334 Rear Seats, Folding ..........................................30
Filter ................................................ 303, 355 Power Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................45
Filter Disposal ...........................................303 Door Locks ..................................................22 Recreational Towing...................................... 133
Identification Logo.....................................302 Inverter ........................................................54 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 352
Materials Added To ...................................303 Liftgate ........................................................60 Refrigerant .................................................... 304
Pressure Warning Light ............................... 77 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................53 Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 187
Recommendation ............................ 302, 355 Sunroof........................................................56 Release, Hood..................................................59
Synthetic ...................................................303 Windows ......................................................55 Reminder, Lights On .................................40, 41
Viscosity ....................................................355 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 238 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 232
Onboard Diagnostic System ............................ 84 Preparation For Jacking ................................ 275 Remote Control
Operating Precautions ..................................... 84 Presets ......................................................... 164 Starting System ...........................................17
Operator Manual Pretensioners Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ...194, 205
Owner's Manual ........................................360 Seat Belts ................................................. 238 Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 195
Outlet Remote Features, Starting ................... 194, 207
Power .......................................................... 53
367
Remote Keyless Entry...................................... 13 Saved Radio Stations ................................... 164 Memory .......................................................27
Arm The Alarm............................................. 20 Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 296 Rear Folding .........................................28, 30
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 21 Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................75 Seatback Release........................................30
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 15 Seat Belts ............................................ 232, 267 Tilting ...........................................................28
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........158 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 236 Ventilated ....................................................33
Remote Starting Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 236 Security Alarm ...........................................20, 77
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 18 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Arm The System ...........................................20
Uconnect Customer Programmable Anchorage ............................................ 236 Disarm The System......................................21
Features.................................................. 19 Child Restraints ........................................ 255 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 355
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 19 Energy Management Feature ................... 239 Send & Go ............................................ 196, 206
Remote Starting System .................................. 17 Extender ................................................... 238 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................15
Replacement Tires.........................................340 Front Seat............................... 232, 233, 235 Service Assistance ........................................ 357
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................359 Inspection................................................. 267 Service Contract ............................................ 358
Restraints, Child ............................................255 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 235 Service Manuals ........................................... 360
Restraints, Head .............................................. 34 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 236 Settings, Audio .............................................. 165
Roadside Assistance ........................... 195, 206 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 233 Shift Lever Override ...................................... 289
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 8 Operating Instructions .............................. 235 Shifting
Roof Type Carrier ............................................. 64 Pregnant Women ...................................... 238 Automatic Transmission ..............................94
Rotation, Tires ...............................................345 Pretensioners ........................................... 238 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 233
Rear Seat ................................................. 233 Side View Mirror Adjustment .....................37, 38
S Reminder.................................................. 232 Signals, Turn ............................ 40, 42, 82, 269
Safety ............................................................157 Seat Belt Extender.................................... 238 Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 160
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................267 Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 238 Favorites ................................................... 162
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................269 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 236 Replay ....................................................... 162
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................359 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 349 SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Safety Features .............................................157 Seats ...............................................................28 Browse in SXM.......................................... 163
Safety Information, Tire .................................330 Adjustment ..................................................28 Favorites ................................................... 162
Safety Tips .....................................................267 Easy Entry ....................................................32 Replay ....................................................... 162 11
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................269 Head Restraints...........................................34 Smart Watch ................................................. 203
Satellite Radio ...............................................160 Heated.........................................................33 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 343
368
Snow Tires .....................................................342 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 220 Radial ....................................................... 338
SOS Call ............................................... 190, 205 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 303 Replacement ............................................ 340
Spare Tires .......................................... 342, 343 System, Remote Starting .................................17 Rotation .................................................... 345
Spark Plugs ...................................................355 Safety .............................................. 330, 337
Specifications T Sizes ......................................................... 331
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................................355 Telescoping Steering Column ..........................26 Snow Tires ................................................ 342
Oil ..............................................................355 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............49 Spare Tires ...................................... 342, 343
Starting ..................................................... 17, 86 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ............................. 62, 63 Spinning ................................................... 339
Automatic Transmission .............................. 86 Tilt Steering Column ........................................26 Trailer Towing ........................................... 131
Button ......................................................... 16 Time Delay Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 340
Cold Weather .............................................. 87 Headlight ..............................................40, 41 Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 351
Engine Fails To Start ................................... 88 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 334 To Open Hood ..................................................59
Remote ....................................................... 17 Tire Markings ................................................ 330 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 130
Starting And Operating .................................... 86 Tire Safety Information ................................. 330 Tow Hooks
Starting Procedures ......................................... 86 Tire Service Kit .............................................. 280 Emergency ................................................ 293
Steering Tires ...................................269, 337, 342, 345 Towing ........................................................... 128
Column Controls .......................................... 40 Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 340 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 292
Tilt Column .................................................. 26 Air Pressure .............................................. 337 Guide ........................................................ 129
Wheel, Heated............................................. 26 Chains ...................................................... 343 Recreational ............................................. 133
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 26 Changing .................................................. 275 Weight ...................................................... 129
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................158 Compact Spare......................................... 342 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 133
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......158 General Information ........................ 337, 342 Towing Eyes .................................................. 294
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 200, 206 High Speed ............................................... 338 Traction Control ................................... 217, 220
Storage ............................................................ 52 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 338 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 220
Storage, Vehicle............................................... 50 Jacking ..................................................... 275 Trailer Towing ................................................ 128
Store Radio Presets .......................................164 Life Of Tires .............................................. 340 Minimum Requirements ........................... 130
Stuck, Freeing ...............................................290 Load Capacity .................................. 334, 335 Tips ........................................................... 133
Sun Roof ................................................... 56, 58 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..80, 227 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 130
Sun Visor ......................................................... 38 Quality Grading ......................................... 345 Wiring ....................................................... 132
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....242 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 129
369
Trailer Weight ................................................129 Cancel Command ..................................... 172 Uconnect Settings

Transaxle Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Au- Customer Programmable Features ..............19
Automatic .................................................... 93 dio Device After Pairing ........................ 174 Uconnect System .......................................... 155
Operation .................................................... 93 Help Command......................................... 172 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 345
Transfer Case Join Calls .................................................. 178 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Fluid ..........................................................356 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Connector ........................................................52
Transmission ................................................... 94 Favorite ................................................ 175 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 236
Automatic ...........................................94, 313 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Fluid ..........................................................356 Progress ............................................... 178 V
Maintenance .............................................313 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 176 Vanity Mirrors ...................................................38
Transporting Pets ..........................................267 Natural Speech......................................... 171 Vehicle Finder ...................................... 198, 206
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................340 Operation ................................................. 171 Vehicle Health Alert....................................... 201
Turn Signals ....................................... 40, 42, 82 Overview ................................................... 169 Vehicle Health Report ................................... 201
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Vehicle Loading .................................... 127, 335
U Phone ................................................... 172 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 9
Uconnect Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 202
Phone Call Features ..................................176 Device .................................................. 173 Vehicle Security Alarm .....................................20
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phonebook Download .............................. 175 Vehicle Storage ................................................50
Phone ...................................................179 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 178 Ventilated Seats ...............................................33
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 19 Power-Up .................................................. 181 Voice Command ............................ 35, 183, 185
Uconnect App ................................................188 Recent Calls ............................................. 177 Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................35
Uconnect Phone ......................... 171, 172, 173 Redial ....................................................... 178
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Cur- To Remove A Favorite ............................... 176 W
rently In Progress ..................................177 Toggling Between Calls............................. 178 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Cur- Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 177 Descriptions) ....................................................78
rently In Progress ..................................177 Transfer Call To And From Mobile Warnings, Roll Over ............................................ 8
Bluetooth Communication Link .................181 Phone ................................................... 179 Warranty Information .................................... 359
Call Continuation .......................................178 Voice Command ....................................... 179 WARRANTY INFORMATION  ..................... 359 11
Call Controls ..............................................176 Washers, Windshield ............................. 43, 301
Call Termination ........................................178
370
Washing Vehicle ............................................348

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...........................347
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............................347
Wi-fi ...............................................................199
Wind Buffeting ................................................. 56
Window Fogging .............................................. 50
Windows .......................................................... 55
Close ........................................................... 55
Down ........................................................... 55
Open ........................................................... 55
Power .......................................................... 55
Up................................................................ 55
Windshield Defroster .....................................268
Windshield Washers ...............................43, 301
Fluid ..........................................................301
Windshield Wiper Blades ...............................305
Windshield Wipers ........................................... 43
Wipers Blade Replacement ...........................305
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ..................................... 44
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
used in substitution therefore. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by comply with all local laws.
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s convenient reference source for common questions.
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off- Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
use public transportation.
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a WARNING!
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
2 02 1 COMPASS
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
202 1 CO MPASS
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
21_MP_OM_EN_USC
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
Second Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

2021 Jeep Compass 69

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Jeep Compass 69

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 02 1 COMPASS

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 65 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 86 4

5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 138 5

6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 212 6

INTRODUCTION DOORS................................................................... 21 MIRRORS...............................................................37

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................... 302 INTERIORS .........................................................349 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

WARNING! Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning

Air Bag Warning Light Liftgate Open Warning Light

Brake Warning Light Oil Pressure Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Yellow Warning Lights Low Coolant Level Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Gray Indicator Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

All doors can be programmed to unlock on the Key Fob:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The push button ignition can be placed in the

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION  Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

locked (lock indicator visible) when you shut the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE: Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

2. All doors are closed.

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

cator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — I F

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) WARNING!

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted NOTE:

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

 The mirrors are accidentally manually

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

EXTERIOR LIGHTS headlamps are turned on or the ignition is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41